Amit Daniel Kachhap | e6a01f5 | 2011-07-20 11:45:59 +0530 | [diff] [blame] | 1 | <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> |
| 2 | <html> |
| 3 | <head> |
| 4 | <meta name="generator" content= |
| 5 | "HTML Tidy for Linux/x86 (vers 1st December 2004), see www.w3.org"> |
| 6 | <title>NCURSES Programming HOWTO</title> |
| 7 | <meta name="GENERATOR" content= |
| 8 | "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"> |
| 9 | </head> |
| 10 | <body class="ARTICLE" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" text="#000000" link= |
| 11 | "#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"> |
| 12 | <div class="ARTICLE"> |
| 13 | <div class="TITLEPAGE"> |
| 14 | <h1 class="TITLE"><a name="AEN2" id="AEN2">NCURSES Programming |
| 15 | HOWTO</a></h1> |
| 16 | <h3 class="AUTHOR"><a name="AEN4" id="AEN4">Pradeep Padala</a></h3> |
| 17 | <div class="AFFILIATION"> |
| 18 | <div class="ADDRESS"> |
| 19 | <p class="ADDRESS"><code class="EMAIL"><<a href= |
| 20 | "mailto:ppadala@gmail.com">ppadala@gmail.com</a>></code></p> |
| 21 | </div> |
| 22 | </div> |
| 23 | <p class="PUBDATE">v1.9, 2005-06-20<br></p> |
| 24 | <div class="REVHISTORY"> |
| 25 | <table width="100%" border="0"> |
| 26 | <tr> |
| 27 | <th align="left" valign="top" colspan="3"><b>Revision |
| 28 | History</b></th> |
| 29 | </tr> |
| 30 | <tr> |
| 31 | <td align="left">Revision 1.9</td> |
| 32 | <td align="left">2005-06-20</td> |
| 33 | <td align="left">Revised by: ppadala</td> |
| 34 | </tr> |
| 35 | <tr> |
| 36 | <td align="left" colspan="3">The license has been changed to the |
| 37 | MIT-style license used by NCURSES. Note that the programs are also |
| 38 | re-licensed under this.</td> |
| 39 | </tr> |
| 40 | <tr> |
| 41 | <td align="left">Revision 1.8</td> |
| 42 | <td align="left">2005-06-17</td> |
| 43 | <td align="left">Revised by: ppadala</td> |
| 44 | </tr> |
| 45 | <tr> |
| 46 | <td align="left" colspan="3">Lots of updates. Added references and |
| 47 | perl examples. Changes to examples. Many grammatical and stylistic |
| 48 | changes to the content. Changes to NCURSES history.</td> |
| 49 | </tr> |
| 50 | <tr> |
| 51 | <td align="left">Revision 1.7.1</td> |
| 52 | <td align="left">2002-06-25</td> |
| 53 | <td align="left">Revised by: ppadala</td> |
| 54 | </tr> |
| 55 | <tr> |
| 56 | <td align="left" colspan="3">Added a README file for building and |
| 57 | instructions for building from source.</td> |
| 58 | </tr> |
| 59 | <tr> |
| 60 | <td align="left">Revision 1.7</td> |
| 61 | <td align="left">2002-06-25</td> |
| 62 | <td align="left">Revised by: ppadala</td> |
| 63 | </tr> |
| 64 | <tr> |
| 65 | <td align="left" colspan="3">Added "Other formats" section and made |
| 66 | a lot of fancy changes to the programs. Inlining of programs is |
| 67 | gone.</td> |
| 68 | </tr> |
| 69 | <tr> |
| 70 | <td align="left">Revision 1.6.1</td> |
| 71 | <td align="left">2002-02-24</td> |
| 72 | <td align="left">Revised by: ppadala</td> |
| 73 | </tr> |
| 74 | <tr> |
| 75 | <td align="left" colspan="3">Removed the old Changelog section, |
| 76 | cleaned the makefiles</td> |
| 77 | </tr> |
| 78 | <tr> |
| 79 | <td align="left">Revision 1.6</td> |
| 80 | <td align="left">2002-02-16</td> |
| 81 | <td align="left">Revised by: ppadala</td> |
| 82 | </tr> |
| 83 | <tr> |
| 84 | <td align="left" colspan="3">Corrected a lot of spelling mistakes, |
| 85 | added ACS variables section</td> |
| 86 | </tr> |
| 87 | <tr> |
| 88 | <td align="left">Revision 1.5</td> |
| 89 | <td align="left">2002-01-05</td> |
| 90 | <td align="left">Revised by: ppadala</td> |
| 91 | </tr> |
| 92 | <tr> |
| 93 | <td align="left" colspan="3">Changed structure to present proper |
| 94 | TOC</td> |
| 95 | </tr> |
| 96 | <tr> |
| 97 | <td align="left">Revision 1.3.1</td> |
| 98 | <td align="left">2001-07-26</td> |
| 99 | <td align="left">Revised by: ppadala</td> |
| 100 | </tr> |
| 101 | <tr> |
| 102 | <td align="left" colspan="3">Corrected maintainers paragraph, |
| 103 | Corrected stable release number</td> |
| 104 | </tr> |
| 105 | <tr> |
| 106 | <td align="left">Revision 1.3</td> |
| 107 | <td align="left">2001-07-24</td> |
| 108 | <td align="left">Revised by: ppadala</td> |
| 109 | </tr> |
| 110 | <tr> |
| 111 | <td align="left" colspan="3">Added copyright notices to main |
| 112 | document (LDP license) and programs (GPL), Corrected |
| 113 | printw_example.</td> |
| 114 | </tr> |
| 115 | <tr> |
| 116 | <td align="left">Revision 1.2</td> |
| 117 | <td align="left">2001-06-05</td> |
| 118 | <td align="left">Revised by: ppadala</td> |
| 119 | </tr> |
| 120 | <tr> |
| 121 | <td align="left" colspan="3">Incorporated ravi's changes. Mainly to |
| 122 | introduction, menu, form, justforfun sections</td> |
| 123 | </tr> |
| 124 | <tr> |
| 125 | <td align="left">Revision 1.1</td> |
| 126 | <td align="left">2001-05-22</td> |
| 127 | <td align="left">Revised by: ppadala</td> |
| 128 | </tr> |
| 129 | <tr> |
| 130 | <td align="left" colspan="3">Added "a word about window" section, |
| 131 | Added scanw_example.</td> |
| 132 | </tr> |
| 133 | </table> |
| 134 | </div> |
| 135 | <div> |
| 136 | <div class="ABSTRACT"><a name="AEN67" id="AEN67"></a> |
| 137 | <p><em>This document is intended to be an "All in One" guide for |
| 138 | programming with ncurses and its sister libraries. We graduate from |
| 139 | a simple "Hello World" program to more complex form manipulation. |
| 140 | No prior experience in ncurses is assumed. Send comments to |
| 141 | <a href="mailto:ppadala@gmail.com" target="_top">this |
| 142 | address</a></em></p> |
| 143 | </div> |
| 144 | </div> |
| 145 | <hr></div> |
| 146 | <div class="TOC"> |
| 147 | <dl> |
| 148 | <dt><b>Table of Contents</b></dt> |
| 149 | <dt>1. <a href="#INTRO">Introduction</a></dt> |
| 150 | <dd> |
| 151 | <dl> |
| 152 | <dt>1.1. <a href="#WHATIS">What is NCURSES?</a></dt> |
| 153 | <dt>1.2. <a href="#WHATCANWEDO">What we can do with |
| 154 | NCURSES</a></dt> |
| 155 | <dt>1.3. <a href="#WHERETOGETIT">Where to get it</a></dt> |
| 156 | <dt>1.4. <a href="#PURPOSE">Purpose/Scope of the document</a></dt> |
| 157 | <dt>1.5. <a href="#ABOUTPROGRAMS">About the Programs</a></dt> |
| 158 | <dt>1.6. <a href="#OTHERFORMATS">Other Formats of the |
| 159 | document</a></dt> |
| 160 | <dt>1.7. <a href="#CREDITS">Credits</a></dt> |
| 161 | <dt>1.8. <a href="#WISHLIST">Wish List</a></dt> |
| 162 | <dt>1.9. <a href="#COPYRIGHT">Copyright</a></dt> |
| 163 | </dl> |
| 164 | </dd> |
| 165 | <dt>2. <a href="#HELLOWORLD">Hello World !!!</a></dt> |
| 166 | <dd> |
| 167 | <dl> |
| 168 | <dt>2.1. <a href="#COMPILECURSES">Compiling With the NCURSES |
| 169 | Library</a></dt> |
| 170 | <dt>2.2. <a href="#DISSECTION">Dissection</a></dt> |
| 171 | </dl> |
| 172 | </dd> |
| 173 | <dt>3. <a href="#GORY">The Gory Details</a></dt> |
| 174 | <dt>4. <a href="#INIT">Initialization</a></dt> |
| 175 | <dd> |
| 176 | <dl> |
| 177 | <dt>4.1. <a href="#ABOUTINIT">Initialization functions</a></dt> |
| 178 | <dt>4.2. <a href="#RAWCBREAK">raw() and cbreak()</a></dt> |
| 179 | <dt>4.3. <a href="#ECHONOECHO">echo() and noecho()</a></dt> |
| 180 | <dt>4.4. <a href="#KEYPAD">keypad()</a></dt> |
| 181 | <dt>4.5. <a href="#HALFDELAY">halfdelay()</a></dt> |
| 182 | <dt>4.6. <a href="#MISCINIT">Miscellaneous Initialization |
| 183 | functions</a></dt> |
| 184 | <dt>4.7. <a href="#INITEX">An Example</a></dt> |
| 185 | </dl> |
| 186 | </dd> |
| 187 | <dt>5. <a href="#AWORDWINDOWS">A Word about Windows</a></dt> |
| 188 | <dt>6. <a href="#PRINTW">Output functions</a></dt> |
| 189 | <dd> |
| 190 | <dl> |
| 191 | <dt>6.1. <a href="#ADDCHCLASS">addch() class of functions</a></dt> |
| 192 | <dt>6.2. <a href="#AEN298">mvaddch(), waddch() and |
| 193 | mvwaddch()</a></dt> |
| 194 | <dt>6.3. <a href="#PRINTWCLASS">printw() class of |
| 195 | functions</a></dt> |
| 196 | <dt>6.4. <a href="#ADDSTRCLASS">addstr() class of |
| 197 | functions</a></dt> |
| 198 | <dt>6.5. <a href="#ACAUTION">A word of caution</a></dt> |
| 199 | </dl> |
| 200 | </dd> |
| 201 | <dt>7. <a href="#SCANW">Input functions</a></dt> |
| 202 | <dd> |
| 203 | <dl> |
| 204 | <dt>7.1. <a href="#GETCHCLASS">getch() class of functions</a></dt> |
| 205 | <dt>7.2. <a href="#SCANWCLASS">scanw() class of functions</a></dt> |
| 206 | <dt>7.3. <a href="#GETSTRCLASS">getstr() class of |
| 207 | functions</a></dt> |
| 208 | <dt>7.4. <a href="#GETSTREX">Some examples</a></dt> |
| 209 | </dl> |
| 210 | </dd> |
| 211 | <dt>8. <a href="#ATTRIB">Attributes</a></dt> |
| 212 | <dd> |
| 213 | <dl> |
| 214 | <dt>8.1. <a href="#ATTRIBDETAILS">The details</a></dt> |
| 215 | <dt>8.2. <a href="#ATTRONVSATTRSET">attron() vs attrset()</a></dt> |
| 216 | <dt>8.3. <a href="#ATTR_GET">attr_get()</a></dt> |
| 217 | <dt>8.4. <a href="#ATTR_FUNCS">attr_ functions</a></dt> |
| 218 | <dt>8.5. <a href="#WATTRFUNCS">wattr functions</a></dt> |
| 219 | <dt>8.6. <a href="#CHGAT">chgat() functions</a></dt> |
| 220 | </dl> |
| 221 | </dd> |
| 222 | <dt>9. <a href="#WINDOWS">Windows</a></dt> |
| 223 | <dd> |
| 224 | <dl> |
| 225 | <dt>9.1. <a href="#WINDOWBASICS">The basics</a></dt> |
| 226 | <dt>9.2. <a href="#LETBEWINDOW">Let there be a Window !!!</a></dt> |
| 227 | <dt>9.3. <a href="#BORDEREXEXPL">Explanation</a></dt> |
| 228 | <dt>9.4. <a href="#OTHERSTUFF">The other stuff in the |
| 229 | example</a></dt> |
| 230 | <dt>9.5. <a href="#OTHERBORDERFUNCS">Other Border |
| 231 | functions</a></dt> |
| 232 | </dl> |
| 233 | </dd> |
| 234 | <dt>10. <a href="#COLOR">Colors</a></dt> |
| 235 | <dd> |
| 236 | <dl> |
| 237 | <dt>10.1. <a href="#COLORBASICS">The basics</a></dt> |
| 238 | <dt>10.2. <a href="#CHANGECOLORDEFS">Changing Color |
| 239 | Definitions</a></dt> |
| 240 | <dt>10.3. <a href="#COLORCONTENT">Color Content</a></dt> |
| 241 | </dl> |
| 242 | </dd> |
| 243 | <dt>11. <a href="#KEYS">Interfacing with the key board</a></dt> |
| 244 | <dd> |
| 245 | <dl> |
| 246 | <dt>11.1. <a href="#KEYSBASICS">The Basics</a></dt> |
| 247 | <dt>11.2. <a href="#SIMPLEKEYEX">A Simple Key Usage |
| 248 | example</a></dt> |
| 249 | </dl> |
| 250 | </dd> |
| 251 | <dt>12. <a href="#MOUSE">Interfacing with the mouse</a></dt> |
| 252 | <dd> |
| 253 | <dl> |
| 254 | <dt>12.1. <a href="#MOUSEBASICS">The Basics</a></dt> |
| 255 | <dt>12.2. <a href="#GETTINGEVENTS">Getting the events</a></dt> |
| 256 | <dt>12.3. <a href="#MOUSETOGETHER">Putting it all Together</a></dt> |
| 257 | <dt>12.4. <a href="#MISCMOUSEFUNCS">Miscellaneous |
| 258 | Functions</a></dt> |
| 259 | </dl> |
| 260 | </dd> |
| 261 | <dt>13. <a href="#SCREEN">Screen Manipulation</a></dt> |
| 262 | <dd> |
| 263 | <dl> |
| 264 | <dt>13.1. <a href="#GETYX">getyx() functions</a></dt> |
| 265 | <dt>13.2. <a href="#SCREENDUMP">Screen Dumping</a></dt> |
| 266 | <dt>13.3. <a href="#WINDOWDUMP">Window Dumping</a></dt> |
| 267 | </dl> |
| 268 | </dd> |
| 269 | <dt>14. <a href="#MISC">Miscellaneous features</a></dt> |
| 270 | <dd> |
| 271 | <dl> |
| 272 | <dt>14.1. <a href="#CURSSET">curs_set()</a></dt> |
| 273 | <dt>14.2. <a href="#TEMPLEAVE">Temporarily Leaving Curses |
| 274 | mode</a></dt> |
| 275 | <dt>14.3. <a href="#ACSVARS">ACS_ variables</a></dt> |
| 276 | </dl> |
| 277 | </dd> |
| 278 | <dt>15. <a href="#OTHERLIB">Other libraries</a></dt> |
| 279 | <dt>16. <a href="#PANELS">Panel Library</a></dt> |
| 280 | <dd> |
| 281 | <dl> |
| 282 | <dt>16.1. <a href="#PANELBASICS">The Basics</a></dt> |
| 283 | <dt>16.2. <a href="#COMPILEPANELS">Compiling With the Panels |
| 284 | Library</a></dt> |
| 285 | <dt>16.3. <a href="#PANELBROWSING">Panel Window Browsing</a></dt> |
| 286 | <dt>16.4. <a href="#USERPTRUSING">Using User Pointers</a></dt> |
| 287 | <dt>16.5. <a href="#PANELMOVERESIZE">Moving and Resizing |
| 288 | Panels</a></dt> |
| 289 | <dt>16.6. <a href="#PANELSHOWHIDE">Hiding and Showing |
| 290 | Panels</a></dt> |
| 291 | <dt>16.7. <a href="#PANELABOVE">panel_above() and panel_below() |
| 292 | Functions</a></dt> |
| 293 | </dl> |
| 294 | </dd> |
| 295 | <dt>17. <a href="#MENUS">Menus Library</a></dt> |
| 296 | <dd> |
| 297 | <dl> |
| 298 | <dt>17.1. <a href="#MENUBASICS">The Basics</a></dt> |
| 299 | <dt>17.2. <a href="#COMPILEMENUS">Compiling With the Menu |
| 300 | Library</a></dt> |
| 301 | <dt>17.3. <a href="#MENUDRIVER">Menu Driver: The work horse of the |
| 302 | menu system</a></dt> |
| 303 | <dt>17.4. <a href="#MENUWINDOWS">Menu Windows</a></dt> |
| 304 | <dt>17.5. <a href="#SCROLLMENUS">Scrolling Menus</a></dt> |
| 305 | <dt>17.6. <a href="#MULTICOLUMN">Multi Columnar Menus</a></dt> |
| 306 | <dt>17.7. <a href="#MULTIVALUEMENUS">Multi Valued Menus</a></dt> |
| 307 | <dt>17.8. <a href="#MENUOPT">Menu Options</a></dt> |
| 308 | <dt>17.9. <a href="#MENUUSERPTR">The useful User Pointer</a></dt> |
| 309 | </dl> |
| 310 | </dd> |
| 311 | <dt>18. <a href="#FORMS">Forms Library</a></dt> |
| 312 | <dd> |
| 313 | <dl> |
| 314 | <dt>18.1. <a href="#FORMBASICS">The Basics</a></dt> |
| 315 | <dt>18.2. <a href="#COMPILEFORMS">Compiling With the Forms |
| 316 | Library</a></dt> |
| 317 | <dt>18.3. <a href="#PLAYFIELDS">Playing with Fields</a></dt> |
| 318 | <dt>18.4. <a href="#FORMWINDOWS">Form Windows</a></dt> |
| 319 | <dt>18.5. <a href="#FILEDVALIDATE">Field Validation</a></dt> |
| 320 | <dt>18.6. <a href="#FORMDRIVER">Form Driver: The work horse of the |
| 321 | forms system</a></dt> |
| 322 | </dl> |
| 323 | </dd> |
| 324 | <dt>19. <a href="#TOOLS">Tools and Widget Libraries</a></dt> |
| 325 | <dd> |
| 326 | <dl> |
| 327 | <dt>19.1. <a href="#CDK">CDK (Curses Development Kit)</a></dt> |
| 328 | <dt>19.2. <a href="#DIALOG">The dialog</a></dt> |
| 329 | <dt>19.3. <a href="#PERLCURSES">Perl Curses Modules CURSES::FORM |
| 330 | and CURSES::WIDGETS</a></dt> |
| 331 | </dl> |
| 332 | </dd> |
| 333 | <dt>20. <a href="#JUSTFORFUN">Just For Fun !!!</a></dt> |
| 334 | <dd> |
| 335 | <dl> |
| 336 | <dt>20.1. <a href="#GAMEOFLIFE">The Game of Life</a></dt> |
| 337 | <dt>20.2. <a href="#MAGIC">Magic Square</a></dt> |
| 338 | <dt>20.3. <a href="#HANOI">Towers of Hanoi</a></dt> |
| 339 | <dt>20.4. <a href="#QUEENS">Queens Puzzle</a></dt> |
| 340 | <dt>20.5. <a href="#SHUFFLE">Shuffle</a></dt> |
| 341 | <dt>20.6. <a href="#TT">Typing Tutor</a></dt> |
| 342 | </dl> |
| 343 | </dd> |
| 344 | <dt>21. <a href="#REF">References</a></dt> |
| 345 | </dl> |
| 346 | </div> |
| 347 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 348 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="INTRO" id="INTRO">1. |
| 349 | Introduction</a></h2> |
| 350 | <p>In the olden days of teletype terminals, terminals were away |
| 351 | from computers and were connected to them through serial cables. |
| 352 | The terminals could be configured by sending a series of bytes. All |
| 353 | the capabilities (such as moving the cursor to a new location, |
| 354 | erasing part of the screen, scrolling the screen, changing modes |
| 355 | etc.) of terminals could be accessed through these series of bytes. |
| 356 | These control seeuqnces are usually called escape sequences, |
| 357 | because they start with an escape(0x1B) character. Even today, with |
| 358 | proper emulation, we can send escape sequences to the emulator and |
| 359 | achieve the same effect on a terminal window.</p> |
| 360 | <p>Suppose you wanted to print a line in color. Try typing this on |
| 361 | your console.</p> |
| 362 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 363 | <tr> |
| 364 | <td> |
| 365 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 366 | <font color="#000000">echo "^[[0;31;40mIn Color"</font> |
| 367 | </pre></td> |
| 368 | </tr> |
| 369 | </table> |
| 370 | <p>The first character is an escape character, which looks like two |
| 371 | characters ^ and [. To be able to print it, you have to press |
| 372 | CTRL+V and then the ESC key. All the others are normal printable |
| 373 | characters. You should be able to see the string "In Color" in red. |
| 374 | It stays that way and to revert back to the original mode type |
| 375 | this.</p> |
| 376 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 377 | <tr> |
| 378 | <td> |
| 379 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 380 | <font color="#000000">echo "^[[0;37;40m"</font> |
| 381 | </pre></td> |
| 382 | </tr> |
| 383 | </table> |
| 384 | <p>Now, what do these magic characters mean? Difficult to |
| 385 | comprehend? They might even be different for different terminals. |
| 386 | So the designers of UNIX invented a mechanism named <var class= |
| 387 | "LITERAL">termcap</var>. It is a file that lists all the |
| 388 | capabilities of a particular terminal, along with the escape |
| 389 | sequences needed to achieve a particular effect. In the later |
| 390 | years, this was replaced by <var class="LITERAL">terminfo</var>. |
| 391 | Without delving too much into details, this mechanism allows |
| 392 | application programs to query the terminfo database and obtain the |
| 393 | control characters to be sent to a terminal or terminal |
| 394 | emulator.</p> |
| 395 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 396 | <hr> |
| 397 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="WHATIS" id="WHATIS">1.1. What is |
| 398 | NCURSES?</a></h3> |
| 399 | <p>You might be wondering, what the import of all this technical |
| 400 | gibberish is. In the above scenario, every application program is |
| 401 | supposed to query the terminfo and perform the necessary stuff |
| 402 | (sending control characters etc.). It soon became difficult to |
| 403 | manage this complexity and this gave birth to 'CURSES'. Curses is a |
| 404 | pun on the name "cursor optimization". The Curses library forms a |
| 405 | wrapper over working with raw terminal codes, and provides highly |
| 406 | flexible and efficient API (Application Programming Interface). It |
| 407 | provides functions to move the cursor, create windows, produce |
| 408 | colors, play with mouse etc. The application programs need not |
| 409 | worry about the underlying terminal capabilities.</p> |
| 410 | <p>So what is NCURSES? NCURSES is a clone of the original System V |
| 411 | Release 4.0 (SVr4) curses. It is a freely distributable library, |
| 412 | fully compatible with older version of curses. In short, it is a |
| 413 | library of functions that manages an application's display on |
| 414 | character-cell terminals. In the remainder of the document, the |
| 415 | terms curses and ncurses are used interchangeably.</p> |
| 416 | <p>A detailed history of NCURSES can be found in the NEWS file from |
| 417 | the source distribution. The current package is maintained by |
| 418 | <a href="mailto:dickey@his.com" target="_top">Thomas Dickey</a>. |
| 419 | You can contact the maintainers at <a href= |
| 420 | "mailto:bug-ncurses@gnu.org" target= |
| 421 | "_top">bug-ncurses@gnu.org</a>.</p> |
| 422 | </div> |
| 423 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 424 | <hr> |
| 425 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="WHATCANWEDO" id="WHATCANWEDO">1.2. What |
| 426 | we can do with NCURSES</a></h3> |
| 427 | <p>NCURSES not only creates a wrapper over terminal capabilities, |
| 428 | but also gives a robust framework to create nice looking UI (User |
| 429 | Interface)s in text mode. It provides functions to create windows |
| 430 | etc. Its sister libraries panel, menu and form provide an extension |
| 431 | to the basic curses library. These libraries usually come along |
| 432 | with curses. One can create applications that contain multiple |
| 433 | windows, menus, panels and forms. Windows can be managed |
| 434 | independently, can provide 'scrollability' and even can be |
| 435 | hidden.</p> |
| 436 | <p>Menus provide the user with an easy command selection option. |
| 437 | Forms allow the creation of easy-to-use data entry and display |
| 438 | windows. Panels extend the capabilities of ncurses to deal with |
| 439 | overlapping and stacked windows.</p> |
| 440 | <p>These are just some of the basic things we can do with ncurses. |
| 441 | As we move along, We will see all the capabilities of these |
| 442 | libraries.</p> |
| 443 | </div> |
| 444 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 445 | <hr> |
| 446 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="WHERETOGETIT" id="WHERETOGETIT">1.3. |
| 447 | Where to get it</a></h3> |
| 448 | <p>All right, now that you know what you can do with ncurses, you |
| 449 | must be rearing to get started. NCURSES is usually shipped with |
| 450 | your installation. In case you don't have the library or want to |
| 451 | compile it on your own, read on.</p> |
| 452 | <p><em>Compiling the package</em></p> |
| 453 | <p>NCURSES can be obtained from <a href= |
| 454 | "ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/ncurses/ncurses.tar.gz" target= |
| 455 | "_top">ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/ncurses/ncurses.tar.gz</a> or any |
| 456 | of the ftp sites mentioned in <a href= |
| 457 | "http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html" target= |
| 458 | "_top">http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html</a>.</p> |
| 459 | <p>Read the README and INSTALL files for details on to how to |
| 460 | install it. It usually involves the following operations.</p> |
| 461 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 462 | <tr> |
| 463 | <td> |
| 464 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 465 | <font color= |
| 466 | "#000000"> tar zxvf ncurses<version>.tar.gz # unzip and untar the archive |
| 467 | cd ncurses<version> # cd to the directory |
| 468 | ./configure # configure the build according to your |
| 469 | # environment |
| 470 | make # make it |
| 471 | su root # become root |
| 472 | make install # install it</font> |
| 473 | </pre></td> |
| 474 | </tr> |
| 475 | </table> |
| 476 | <p><em>Using the RPM</em></p> |
| 477 | <p>NCURSES RPM can be found and downloaded from <a href= |
| 478 | "http://rpmfind.net" target="_top">http://rpmfind.net</a> . The RPM |
| 479 | can be installed with the following command after becoming |
| 480 | root.</p> |
| 481 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 482 | <tr> |
| 483 | <td> |
| 484 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 485 | <font color="#000000"> rpm -i <downloaded rpm></font> |
| 486 | </pre></td> |
| 487 | </tr> |
| 488 | </table> |
| 489 | </div> |
| 490 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 491 | <hr> |
| 492 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="PURPOSE" id="PURPOSE">1.4. Purpose/Scope |
| 493 | of the document</a></h3> |
| 494 | <p>This document is intended to be a "All in One" guide for |
| 495 | programming with ncurses and its sister libraries. We graduate from |
| 496 | a simple "Hello World" program to more complex form manipulation. |
| 497 | No prior experience in ncurses is assumed. The writing is informal, |
| 498 | but a lot of detail is provided for each of the examples.</p> |
| 499 | </div> |
| 500 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 501 | <hr> |
| 502 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="ABOUTPROGRAMS" id="ABOUTPROGRAMS">1.5. |
| 503 | About the Programs</a></h3> |
| 504 | <p>All the programs in the document are available in zipped form |
| 505 | <a href= |
| 506 | "http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/NCURSES-Programming-HOWTO/ncurses_programs.tar.gz" |
| 507 | target="_top">here</a>. Unzip and untar it. The directory structure |
| 508 | looks like this.</p> |
| 509 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 510 | <tr> |
| 511 | <td> |
| 512 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 513 | <font color="#000000">ncurses |
| 514 | | |
| 515 | |----> JustForFun -- just for fun programs |
| 516 | |----> basics -- basic programs |
| 517 | |----> demo -- output files go into this directory after make |
| 518 | | | |
| 519 | | |----> exe -- exe files of all example programs |
| 520 | |----> forms -- programs related to form library |
| 521 | |----> menus -- programs related to menus library |
| 522 | |----> panels -- programs related to panels library |
| 523 | |----> perl -- perl equivalents of the examples (contributed |
| 524 | | by Anuradha Ratnaweera) |
| 525 | |----> Makefile -- the top level Makefile |
| 526 | |----> README -- the top level README file. contains instructions |
| 527 | |----> COPYING -- copyright notice</font> |
| 528 | </pre></td> |
| 529 | </tr> |
| 530 | </table> |
| 531 | <p>The individual directories contain the following files.</p> |
| 532 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 533 | <tr> |
| 534 | <td> |
| 535 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 536 | <font color="#000000">Description of files in each directory |
| 537 | -------------------------------------- |
| 538 | JustForFun |
| 539 | | |
| 540 | |----> hanoi.c -- The Towers of Hanoi Solver |
| 541 | |----> life.c -- The Game of Life demo |
| 542 | |----> magic.c -- An Odd Order Magic Square builder |
| 543 | |----> queens.c -- The famous N-Queens Solver |
| 544 | |----> shuffle.c -- A fun game, if you have time to kill |
| 545 | |----> tt.c -- A very trivial typing tutor |
| 546 | |
| 547 | basics |
| 548 | | |
| 549 | |----> acs_vars.c -- ACS_ variables example |
| 550 | |----> hello_world.c -- Simple "Hello World" Program |
| 551 | |----> init_func_example.c -- Initialization functions example |
| 552 | |----> key_code.c -- Shows the scan code of the key pressed |
| 553 | |----> mouse_menu.c -- A menu accessible by mouse |
| 554 | |----> other_border.c -- Shows usage of other border functions apa |
| 555 | | -- rt from box() |
| 556 | |----> printw_example.c -- A very simple printw() example |
| 557 | |----> scanw_example.c -- A very simple getstr() example |
| 558 | |----> simple_attr.c -- A program that can print a c file with |
| 559 | | -- comments in attribute |
| 560 | |----> simple_color.c -- A simple example demonstrating colors |
| 561 | |----> simple_key.c -- A menu accessible with keyboard UP, DOWN |
| 562 | | -- arrows |
| 563 | |----> temp_leave.c -- Demonstrates temporarily leaving curses mode |
| 564 | |----> win_border.c -- Shows Creation of windows and borders |
| 565 | |----> with_chgat.c -- chgat() usage example |
| 566 | |
| 567 | forms |
| 568 | | |
| 569 | |----> form_attrib.c -- Usage of field attributes |
| 570 | |----> form_options.c -- Usage of field options |
| 571 | |----> form_simple.c -- A simple form example |
| 572 | |----> form_win.c -- Demo of windows associated with forms |
| 573 | |
| 574 | menus |
| 575 | | |
| 576 | |----> menu_attrib.c -- Usage of menu attributes |
| 577 | |----> menu_item_data.c -- Usage of item_name() etc.. functions |
| 578 | |----> menu_multi_column.c -- Creates multi columnar menus |
| 579 | |----> menu_scroll.c -- Demonstrates scrolling capability of menus |
| 580 | |----> menu_simple.c -- A simple menu accessed by arrow keys |
| 581 | |----> menu_toggle.c -- Creates multi valued menus and explains |
| 582 | | -- REQ_TOGGLE_ITEM |
| 583 | |----> menu_userptr.c -- Usage of user pointer |
| 584 | |----> menu_win.c -- Demo of windows associated with menus |
| 585 | |
| 586 | panels |
| 587 | | |
| 588 | |----> panel_browse.c -- Panel browsing through tab. Usage of user |
| 589 | | -- pointer |
| 590 | |----> panel_hide.c -- Hiding and Un hiding of panels |
| 591 | |----> panel_resize.c -- Moving and resizing of panels |
| 592 | |----> panel_simple.c -- A simple panel example |
| 593 | |
| 594 | perl |
| 595 | |----> 01-10.pl -- Perl equivalents of first ten example programs</font> |
| 596 | </pre></td> |
| 597 | </tr> |
| 598 | </table> |
| 599 | <p>There is a top level Makefile included in the main directory. It |
| 600 | builds all the files and puts the ready-to-use exes in demo/exe |
| 601 | directory. You can also do selective make by going into the |
| 602 | corresponding directory. Each directory contains a README file |
| 603 | explaining the purpose of each c file in the directory.</p> |
| 604 | <p>For every example, I have included path name for the file |
| 605 | relative to the examples directory.</p> |
| 606 | <p>If you prefer browsing individual programs, point your browser |
| 607 | to <a href= |
| 608 | "http://tldp.org/HOWTO/NCURSES-Programming-HOWTO/ncurses_programs/" |
| 609 | target= |
| 610 | "_top">http://tldp.org/HOWTO/NCURSES-Programming-HOWTO/ncurses_programs/</a></p> |
| 611 | <p>All the programs are released under the same license that is |
| 612 | used by ncurses (MIT-style). This gives you the ability to do |
| 613 | pretty much anything other than claiming them as yours. Feel free |
| 614 | to use them in your programs as appropriate.</p> |
| 615 | </div> |
| 616 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 617 | <hr> |
| 618 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="OTHERFORMATS" id="OTHERFORMATS">1.6. |
| 619 | Other Formats of the document</a></h3> |
| 620 | <p>This howto is also availabe in various other formats on the |
| 621 | tldp.org site. Here are the links to other formats of this |
| 622 | document.</p> |
| 623 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 624 | <hr> |
| 625 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="LISTFORMATS" id="LISTFORMATS">1.6.1. |
| 626 | Readily available formats from tldp.org</a></h4> |
| 627 | <ul> |
| 628 | <li> |
| 629 | <p><a href= |
| 630 | "http://www.ibiblio.org/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/other-formats/pdf/NCURSES-Programming-HOWTO.pdf" |
| 631 | target="_top">Acrobat PDF Format</a></p> |
| 632 | </li> |
| 633 | <li> |
| 634 | <p><a href= |
| 635 | "http://www.ibiblio.org/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/other-formats/ps/NCURSES-Programming-HOWTO.ps.gz" |
| 636 | target="_top">PostScript Format</a></p> |
| 637 | </li> |
| 638 | <li> |
| 639 | <p><a href= |
| 640 | "http://www.ibiblio.org/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/other-formats/html/NCURSES-Programming-HOWTO-html.tar.gz" |
| 641 | target="_top">In Multiple HTML pages</a></p> |
| 642 | </li> |
| 643 | <li> |
| 644 | <p><a href= |
| 645 | "http://www.ibiblio.org/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/other-formats/html_single/NCURSES-Programming-HOWTO.html" |
| 646 | target="_top">In One big HTML format</a></p> |
| 647 | </li> |
| 648 | </ul> |
| 649 | </div> |
| 650 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 651 | <hr> |
| 652 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="BUILDSOURCE" id="BUILDSOURCE">1.6.2. |
| 653 | Building from source</a></h4> |
| 654 | <p>If above links are broken or if you want to experiment with sgml |
| 655 | read on.</p> |
| 656 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 657 | <tr> |
| 658 | <td> |
| 659 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 660 | <font color= |
| 661 | "#000000"> Get both the source and the tar,gzipped programs, available at |
| 662 | http://cvsview.tldp.org/index.cgi/LDP/howto/docbook/ |
| 663 | NCURSES-HOWTO/NCURSES-Programming-HOWTO.sgml |
| 664 | http://cvsview.tldp.org/index.cgi/LDP/howto/docbook/ |
| 665 | NCURSES-HOWTO/ncurses_programs.tar.gz |
| 666 | |
| 667 | Unzip ncurses_programs.tar.gz with |
| 668 | tar zxvf ncurses_programs.tar.gz |
| 669 | |
| 670 | Use jade to create various formats. For example if you just want to create |
| 671 | the multiple html files, you would use |
| 672 | jade -t sgml -i html -d <path to docbook html stylesheet> |
| 673 | NCURSES-Programming-HOWTO.sgml |
| 674 | to get pdf, first create a single html file of the HOWTO with |
| 675 | jade -t sgml -i html -d <path to docbook html stylesheet> -V nochunks |
| 676 | NCURSES-Programming-HOWTO.sgml > NCURSES-ONE-BIG-FILE.html |
| 677 | then use htmldoc to get pdf file with |
| 678 | htmldoc --size universal -t pdf --firstpage p1 -f <output file name.pdf> |
| 679 | NCURSES-ONE-BIG-FILE.html |
| 680 | for ps, you would use |
| 681 | htmldoc --size universal -t ps --firstpage p1 -f <output file name.ps> |
| 682 | NCURSES-ONE-BIG-FILE.html</font> |
| 683 | </pre></td> |
| 684 | </tr> |
| 685 | </table> |
| 686 | <p>See <a href="http://www.tldp.org/LDP/LDP-Author-Guide/" target= |
| 687 | "_top">LDP Author guide</a> for more details. If all else failes, |
| 688 | mail me at <a href="ppadala@gmail.com" target= |
| 689 | "_top">ppadala@gmail.com</a></p> |
| 690 | </div> |
| 691 | </div> |
| 692 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 693 | <hr> |
| 694 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="CREDITS" id="CREDITS">1.7. |
| 695 | Credits</a></h3> |
| 696 | <p>I thank <a href="mailto:sharath_1@usa.net" target= |
| 697 | "_top">Sharath</a> and Emre Akbas for helping me with few sections. |
| 698 | The introduction was initially written by sharath. I rewrote it |
| 699 | with few excerpts taken from his initial work. Emre helped in |
| 700 | writing printw and scanw sections.</p> |
| 701 | <p>Perl equivalents of the example programs are contributed by |
| 702 | <a href="mailto:Aratnaweera@virtusa.com" target="_top">Anuradha |
| 703 | Ratnaweera</a>.</p> |
| 704 | <p>Then comes <a href="mailto:parimi@ece.arizona.edu" target= |
| 705 | "_top">Ravi Parimi</a>, my dearest friend, who has been on this |
| 706 | project before even one line was written. He constantly bombarded |
| 707 | me with suggestions and patiently reviewed the whole text. He also |
| 708 | checked each program on Linux and Solaris.</p> |
| 709 | </div> |
| 710 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 711 | <hr> |
| 712 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="WISHLIST" id="WISHLIST">1.8. Wish |
| 713 | List</a></h3> |
| 714 | <p>This is the wish list, in the order of priority. If you have a |
| 715 | wish or you want to work on completing the wish, mail <a href= |
| 716 | "mailto:ppadala@gmail.com" target="_top">me</a>.</p> |
| 717 | <ul> |
| 718 | <li> |
| 719 | <p>Add examples to last parts of forms section.</p> |
| 720 | </li> |
| 721 | <li> |
| 722 | <p>Prepare a Demo showing all the programs and allow the user to |
| 723 | browse through description of each program. Let the user compile |
| 724 | and see the program in action. A dialog based interface is |
| 725 | preferred.</p> |
| 726 | </li> |
| 727 | <li> |
| 728 | <p>Add debug info. _tracef, _tracemouse stuff.</p> |
| 729 | </li> |
| 730 | <li> |
| 731 | <p>Accessing termcap, terminfo using functions provided by ncurses |
| 732 | package.</p> |
| 733 | </li> |
| 734 | <li> |
| 735 | <p>Working on two terminals simultaneously.</p> |
| 736 | </li> |
| 737 | <li> |
| 738 | <p>Add more stuff to miscellaneous section.</p> |
| 739 | </li> |
| 740 | </ul> |
| 741 | </div> |
| 742 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 743 | <hr> |
| 744 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="COPYRIGHT" id="COPYRIGHT">1.9. |
| 745 | Copyright</a></h3> |
| 746 | <p>Copyright © 2001 by Pradeep Padala.</p> |
| 747 | <p>Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person |
| 748 | obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation |
| 749 | files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without |
| 750 | restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, |
| 751 | modify, merge, publish, distribute, distribute with modifications, |
| 752 | sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit |
| 753 | persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the |
| 754 | following conditions:</p> |
| 755 | <p>The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be |
| 756 | included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.</p> |
| 757 | <p>THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, |
| 758 | EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF |
| 759 | MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND |
| 760 | NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE |
| 761 | LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN |
| 762 | ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN |
| 763 | CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE |
| 764 | SOFTWARE.</p> |
| 765 | <p>Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above |
| 766 | copyright holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to |
| 767 | promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without |
| 768 | prior written authorization.</p> |
| 769 | </div> |
| 770 | </div> |
| 771 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 772 | <hr> |
| 773 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="HELLOWORLD" id="HELLOWORLD">2. Hello |
| 774 | World !!!</a></h2> |
| 775 | <p>Welcome to the world of curses. Before we plunge into the |
| 776 | library and look into its various features, let's write a simple |
| 777 | program and say hello to the world.</p> |
| 778 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 779 | <hr> |
| 780 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="COMPILECURSES" id="COMPILECURSES">2.1. |
| 781 | Compiling With the NCURSES Library</a></h3> |
| 782 | <p>To use ncurses library functions, you have to include ncurses.h |
| 783 | in your programs. To link the program with ncurses the flag |
| 784 | -lncurses should be added.</p> |
| 785 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 786 | <tr> |
| 787 | <td> |
| 788 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 789 | <font color="#000000"> #include <ncurses.h> |
| 790 | . |
| 791 | . |
| 792 | . |
| 793 | |
| 794 | compile and link: gcc <program file> -lncurses</font> |
| 795 | </pre></td> |
| 796 | </tr> |
| 797 | </table> |
| 798 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="BHW" id="BHW"></a> |
| 799 | <p><b>Example 1. The Hello World !!! Program</b></p> |
| 800 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 801 | <tr> |
| 802 | <td> |
| 803 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 804 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 805 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <ncurses.h> |
| 806 | |
| 807 | int main() |
| 808 | { |
| 809 | initscr(); /* Start curses mode */ |
| 810 | printw("Hello World !!!"); /* Print Hello World */ |
| 811 | refresh(); /* Print it on to the real screen */ |
| 812 | getch(); /* Wait for user input */ |
| 813 | endwin(); /* End curses mode */ |
| 814 | |
| 815 | return 0; |
| 816 | }</span></font> |
| 817 | </pre></td> |
| 818 | </tr> |
| 819 | </table> |
| 820 | </div> |
| 821 | </div> |
| 822 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 823 | <hr> |
| 824 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="DISSECTION" id="DISSECTION">2.2. |
| 825 | Dissection</a></h3> |
| 826 | <p>The above program prints "Hello World !!!" to the screen and |
| 827 | exits. This program shows how to initialize curses and do screen |
| 828 | manipulation and end curses mode. Let's dissect it line by |
| 829 | line.</p> |
| 830 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 831 | <hr> |
| 832 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="ABOUT-INITSCR" id="ABOUT-INITSCR">2.2.1. |
| 833 | About initscr()</a></h4> |
| 834 | <p>The function initscr() initializes the terminal in curses mode. |
| 835 | In some implementations, it clears the screen and presents a blank |
| 836 | screen. To do any screen manipulation using curses package this has |
| 837 | to be called first. This function initializes the curses system and |
| 838 | allocates memory for our present window (called <var class= |
| 839 | "LITERAL">stdscr</var>) and some other data-structures. Under |
| 840 | extreme cases this function might fail due to insufficient memory |
| 841 | to allocate memory for curses library's data structures.</p> |
| 842 | <p>After this is done, we can do a variety of initializations to |
| 843 | customize our curses settings. These details will be explained |
| 844 | <a href="#INIT">later</a> .</p> |
| 845 | </div> |
| 846 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 847 | <hr> |
| 848 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="MYST-REFRESH" id="MYST-REFRESH">2.2.2. |
| 849 | The mysterious refresh()</a></h4> |
| 850 | <p>The next line printw prints the string "Hello World !!!" on to |
| 851 | the screen. This function is analogous to normal printf in all |
| 852 | respects except that it prints the data on a window called stdscr |
| 853 | at the current (y,x) co-ordinates. Since our present co-ordinates |
| 854 | are at 0,0 the string is printed at the left hand corner of the |
| 855 | window.</p> |
| 856 | <p>This brings us to that mysterious refresh(). Well, when we |
| 857 | called printw the data is actually written to an imaginary window, |
| 858 | which is not updated on the screen yet. The job of printw is to |
| 859 | update a few flags and data structures and write the data to a |
| 860 | buffer corresponding to stdscr. In order to show it on the screen, |
| 861 | we need to call refresh() and tell the curses system to dump the |
| 862 | contents on the screen.</p> |
| 863 | <p>The philosophy behind all this is to allow the programmer to do |
| 864 | multiple updates on the imaginary screen or windows and do a |
| 865 | refresh once all his screen update is done. refresh() checks the |
| 866 | window and updates only the portion which has been changed. This |
| 867 | improves performance and offers greater flexibility too. But, it is |
| 868 | sometimes frustrating to beginners. A common mistake committed by |
| 869 | beginners is to forget to call refresh() after they did some update |
| 870 | through printw() class of functions. I still forget to add it |
| 871 | sometimes :-)</p> |
| 872 | </div> |
| 873 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 874 | <hr> |
| 875 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="ABOUT-ENDWIN" id="ABOUT-ENDWIN">2.2.3. |
| 876 | About endwin()</a></h4> |
| 877 | <p>And finally don't forget to end the curses mode. Otherwise your |
| 878 | terminal might behave strangely after the program quits. endwin() |
| 879 | frees the memory taken by curses sub-system and its data structures |
| 880 | and puts the terminal in normal mode. This function must be called |
| 881 | after you are done with the curses mode.</p> |
| 882 | </div> |
| 883 | </div> |
| 884 | </div> |
| 885 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 886 | <hr> |
| 887 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="GORY" id="GORY">3. The Gory |
| 888 | Details</a></h2> |
| 889 | <p>Now that we have seen how to write a simple curses program let's |
| 890 | get into the details. There are many functions that help customize |
| 891 | what you see on screen and many features which can be put to full |
| 892 | use.</p> |
| 893 | <p>Here we go...</p> |
| 894 | </div> |
| 895 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 896 | <hr> |
| 897 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="INIT" id="INIT">4. |
| 898 | Initialization</a></h2> |
| 899 | <p>We now know that to initialize curses system the function |
| 900 | initscr() has to be called. There are functions which can be called |
| 901 | after this initialization to customize our curses session. We may |
| 902 | ask the curses system to set the terminal in raw mode or initialize |
| 903 | color or initialize the mouse etc.. Let's discuss some of the |
| 904 | functions that are normally called immediately after initscr();</p> |
| 905 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 906 | <hr> |
| 907 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="ABOUTINIT" id="ABOUTINIT">4.1. |
| 908 | Initialization functions</a></h3> |
| 909 | </div> |
| 910 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 911 | <hr> |
| 912 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="RAWCBREAK" id="RAWCBREAK">4.2. raw() and |
| 913 | cbreak()</a></h3> |
| 914 | <p>Normally the terminal driver buffers the characters a user types |
| 915 | until a new line or carriage return is encountered. But most |
| 916 | programs require that the characters be available as soon as the |
| 917 | user types them. The above two functions are used to disable line |
| 918 | buffering. The difference between these two functions is in the way |
| 919 | control characters like suspend (CTRL-Z), interrupt and quit |
| 920 | (CTRL-C) are passed to the program. In the raw() mode these |
| 921 | characters are directly passed to the program without generating a |
| 922 | signal. In the <var class="LITERAL">cbreak()</var> mode these |
| 923 | control characters are interpreted as any other character by the |
| 924 | terminal driver. I personally prefer to use raw() as I can exercise |
| 925 | greater control over what the user does.</p> |
| 926 | </div> |
| 927 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 928 | <hr> |
| 929 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="ECHONOECHO" id="ECHONOECHO">4.3. echo() |
| 930 | and noecho()</a></h3> |
| 931 | <p>These functions control the echoing of characters typed by the |
| 932 | user to the terminal. <var class="LITERAL">noecho()</var> switches |
| 933 | off echoing. The reason you might want to do this is to gain more |
| 934 | control over echoing or to suppress unnecessary echoing while |
| 935 | taking input from the user through the getch() etc. functions. Most |
| 936 | of the interactive programs call <var class= |
| 937 | "LITERAL">noecho()</var> at initialization and do the echoing of |
| 938 | characters in a controlled manner. It gives the programmer the |
| 939 | flexibility of echoing characters at any place in the window |
| 940 | without updating current (y,x) co-ordinates.</p> |
| 941 | </div> |
| 942 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 943 | <hr> |
| 944 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="KEYPAD" id="KEYPAD">4.4. |
| 945 | keypad()</a></h3> |
| 946 | <p>This is my favorite initialization function. It enables the |
| 947 | reading of function keys like F1, F2, arrow keys etc. Almost every |
| 948 | interactive program enables this, as arrow keys are a major part of |
| 949 | any User Interface. Do <var class="LITERAL">keypad(stdscr, |
| 950 | TRUE)</var> to enable this feature for the regular screen (stdscr). |
| 951 | You will learn more about key management in later sections of this |
| 952 | document.</p> |
| 953 | </div> |
| 954 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 955 | <hr> |
| 956 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="HALFDELAY" id="HALFDELAY">4.5. |
| 957 | halfdelay()</a></h3> |
| 958 | <p>This function, though not used very often, is a useful one at |
| 959 | times. halfdelay()is called to enable the half-delay mode, which is |
| 960 | similar to the cbreak() mode in that characters typed are |
| 961 | immediately available to program. However, it waits for 'X' tenths |
| 962 | of a second for input and then returns ERR, if no input is |
| 963 | available. 'X' is the timeout value passed to the function |
| 964 | halfdelay(). This function is useful when you want to ask the user |
| 965 | for input, and if he doesn't respond with in certain time, we can |
| 966 | do some thing else. One possible example is a timeout at the |
| 967 | password prompt.</p> |
| 968 | </div> |
| 969 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 970 | <hr> |
| 971 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="MISCINIT" id="MISCINIT">4.6. |
| 972 | Miscellaneous Initialization functions</a></h3> |
| 973 | <p>There are few more functions which are called at initialization |
| 974 | to customize curses behavior. They are not used as extensively as |
| 975 | those mentioned above. Some of them are explained where |
| 976 | appropriate.</p> |
| 977 | </div> |
| 978 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 979 | <hr> |
| 980 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="INITEX" id="INITEX">4.7. An |
| 981 | Example</a></h3> |
| 982 | <p>Let's write a program which will clarify the usage of these |
| 983 | functions.</p> |
| 984 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="BINFU" id="BINFU"></a> |
| 985 | <p><b>Example 2. Initialization Function Usage example</b></p> |
| 986 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 987 | <tr> |
| 988 | <td> |
| 989 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 990 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 991 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <ncurses.h> |
| 992 | |
| 993 | int main() |
| 994 | { int ch; |
| 995 | |
| 996 | initscr(); /* Start curses mode */ |
| 997 | raw(); /* Line buffering disabled */ |
| 998 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); /* We get F1, F2 etc.. */ |
| 999 | noecho(); /* Don't echo() while we do getch */ |
| 1000 | |
| 1001 | printw("Type any character to see it in bold\n"); |
| 1002 | ch = getch(); /* If raw() hadn't been called |
| 1003 | * we have to press enter before it |
| 1004 | * gets to the program */ |
| 1005 | if(ch == KEY_F(1)) /* Without keypad enabled this will */ |
| 1006 | printw("F1 Key pressed");/* not get to us either */ |
| 1007 | /* Without noecho() some ugly escape |
| 1008 | * charachters might have been printed |
| 1009 | * on screen */ |
| 1010 | else |
| 1011 | { printw("The pressed key is "); |
| 1012 | attron(A_BOLD); |
| 1013 | printw("%c", ch); |
| 1014 | attroff(A_BOLD); |
| 1015 | } |
| 1016 | refresh(); /* Print it on to the real screen */ |
| 1017 | getch(); /* Wait for user input */ |
| 1018 | endwin(); /* End curses mode */ |
| 1019 | |
| 1020 | return 0; |
| 1021 | }</span></font> |
| 1022 | </pre></td> |
| 1023 | </tr> |
| 1024 | </table> |
| 1025 | </div> |
| 1026 | <p>This program is self-explanatory. But I used functions which |
| 1027 | aren't explained yet. The function <var class= |
| 1028 | "LITERAL">getch()</var> is used to get a character from user. It is |
| 1029 | equivalent to normal <var class="LITERAL">getchar()</var> except |
| 1030 | that we can disable the line buffering to avoid <enter> after |
| 1031 | input. Look for more about <var class="LITERAL">getch()</var>and |
| 1032 | reading keys in the <a href="#KEYS">key management section</a> . |
| 1033 | The functions attron and attroff are used to switch some attributes |
| 1034 | on and off respectively. In the example I used them to print the |
| 1035 | character in bold. These functions are explained in detail |
| 1036 | later.</p> |
| 1037 | </div> |
| 1038 | </div> |
| 1039 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 1040 | <hr> |
| 1041 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="AWORDWINDOWS" id="AWORDWINDOWS">5. A |
| 1042 | Word about Windows</a></h2> |
| 1043 | <p>Before we plunge into the myriad ncurses functions, let me clear |
| 1044 | few things about windows. Windows are explained in detail in |
| 1045 | following <a href="#WINDOWS">sections</a></p> |
| 1046 | <p>A Window is an imaginary screen defined by curses system. A |
| 1047 | window does not mean a bordered window which you usually see on |
| 1048 | Win9X platforms. When curses is initialized, it creates a default |
| 1049 | window named <var class="LITERAL">stdscr</var> which represents |
| 1050 | your 80x25 (or the size of window in which you are running) screen. |
| 1051 | If you are doing simple tasks like printing few strings, reading |
| 1052 | input etc., you can safely use this single window for all of your |
| 1053 | purposes. You can also create windows and call functions which |
| 1054 | explicitly work on the specified window.</p> |
| 1055 | <p>For example, if you call</p> |
| 1056 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1057 | <tr> |
| 1058 | <td> |
| 1059 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1060 | <font color="#000000"> printw("Hi There !!!"); |
| 1061 | refresh();</font> |
| 1062 | </pre></td> |
| 1063 | </tr> |
| 1064 | </table> |
| 1065 | <p>It prints the string on stdscr at the present cursor position. |
| 1066 | Similarly the call to refresh(), works on stdscr only.</p> |
| 1067 | <p>Say you have created <a href="#WINDOWS">windows</a> then you |
| 1068 | have to call a function with a 'w' added to the usual function.</p> |
| 1069 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1070 | <tr> |
| 1071 | <td> |
| 1072 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1073 | <font color="#000000"> wprintw(win, "Hi There !!!"); |
| 1074 | wrefresh(win);</font> |
| 1075 | </pre></td> |
| 1076 | </tr> |
| 1077 | </table> |
| 1078 | <p>As you will see in the rest of the document, naming of functions |
| 1079 | follow the same convention. For each function there usually are |
| 1080 | three more functions.</p> |
| 1081 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1082 | <tr> |
| 1083 | <td> |
| 1084 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1085 | <font color= |
| 1086 | "#000000"> printw(string); /* Print on stdscr at present cursor position */ |
| 1087 | mvprintw(y, x, string);/* Move to (y, x) then print string */ |
| 1088 | wprintw(win, string); /* Print on window win at present cursor position */ |
| 1089 | /* in the window */ |
| 1090 | mvwprintw(win, y, x, string); /* Move to (y, x) relative to window */ |
| 1091 | /* co-ordinates and then print */</font> |
| 1092 | </pre></td> |
| 1093 | </tr> |
| 1094 | </table> |
| 1095 | <p>Usually the w-less functions are macros which expand to |
| 1096 | corresponding w-function with stdscr as the window parameter.</p> |
| 1097 | </div> |
| 1098 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 1099 | <hr> |
| 1100 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="PRINTW" id="PRINTW">6. Output |
| 1101 | functions</a></h2> |
| 1102 | <p>I guess you can't wait any more to see some action. Back to our |
| 1103 | odyssey of curses functions. Now that curses is initialized, let's |
| 1104 | interact with world.</p> |
| 1105 | <p>There are three classes of functions which you can use to do |
| 1106 | output on screen.</p> |
| 1107 | <ol type="1"> |
| 1108 | <li> |
| 1109 | <p>addch() class: Print single character with attributes</p> |
| 1110 | </li> |
| 1111 | <li> |
| 1112 | <p>printw() class: Print formatted output similar to printf()</p> |
| 1113 | </li> |
| 1114 | <li> |
| 1115 | <p>addstr() class: Print strings</p> |
| 1116 | </li> |
| 1117 | </ol> |
| 1118 | <p>These functions can be used interchangeably and it's a matter of |
| 1119 | style as to which class is used. Let's see each one in detail.</p> |
| 1120 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1121 | <hr> |
| 1122 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="ADDCHCLASS" id="ADDCHCLASS">6.1. addch() |
| 1123 | class of functions</a></h3> |
| 1124 | <p>These functions put a single character into the current cursor |
| 1125 | location and advance the position of the cursor. You can give the |
| 1126 | character to be printed but they usually are used to print a |
| 1127 | character with some attributes. Attributes are explained in detail |
| 1128 | in later <a href="#ATTRIB">sections</a> of the document. If a |
| 1129 | character is associated with an attribute(bold, reverse video |
| 1130 | etc.), when curses prints the character, it is printed in that |
| 1131 | attribute.</p> |
| 1132 | <p>In order to combine a character with some attributes, you have |
| 1133 | two options:</p> |
| 1134 | <ul> |
| 1135 | <li> |
| 1136 | <p>By OR'ing a single character with the desired attribute macros. |
| 1137 | These attribute macros could be found in the header file |
| 1138 | <var class="LITERAL">ncurses.h</var>. For example, you want to |
| 1139 | print a character ch(of type char) bold and underlined, you would |
| 1140 | call addch() as below.</p> |
| 1141 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="90%"> |
| 1142 | <tr> |
| 1143 | <td> |
| 1144 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1145 | <font color="#000000"> addch(ch | A_BOLD | A_UNDERLINE);</font> |
| 1146 | </pre></td> |
| 1147 | </tr> |
| 1148 | </table> |
| 1149 | </li> |
| 1150 | <li> |
| 1151 | <p>By using functions like <var class= |
| 1152 | "LITERAL">attrset(),attron(),attroff()</var>. These functions are |
| 1153 | explained in the <a href="#ATTRIB">Attributes</a> section. Briefly, |
| 1154 | they manipulate the current attributes of the given window. Once |
| 1155 | set, the character printed in the window are associated with the |
| 1156 | attributes until it is turned off.</p> |
| 1157 | </li> |
| 1158 | </ul> |
| 1159 | <p>Additionally, <var class="LITERAL">curses</var> provides some |
| 1160 | special characters for character-based graphics. You can draw |
| 1161 | tables, horizontal or vertical lines, etc. You can find all |
| 1162 | avaliable characters in the header file <var class= |
| 1163 | "LITERAL">ncurses.h</var>. Try looking for macros beginning with |
| 1164 | <var class="LITERAL">ACS_</var> in this file.</p> |
| 1165 | </div> |
| 1166 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1167 | <hr> |
| 1168 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="AEN298" id="AEN298">6.2. mvaddch(), |
| 1169 | waddch() and mvwaddch()</a></h3> |
| 1170 | <p><var class="LITERAL">mvaddch()</var> is used to move the cursor |
| 1171 | to a given point, and then print. Thus, the calls:</p> |
| 1172 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1173 | <tr> |
| 1174 | <td> |
| 1175 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1176 | <font color= |
| 1177 | "#000000"> move(row,col); /* moves the cursor to row<em>th</em> row and col<em>th</em> column */ |
| 1178 | addch(ch);</font> |
| 1179 | </pre></td> |
| 1180 | </tr> |
| 1181 | </table> |
| 1182 | can be replaced by |
| 1183 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1184 | <tr> |
| 1185 | <td> |
| 1186 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1187 | <font color="#000000"> mvaddch(row,col,ch);</font> |
| 1188 | </pre></td> |
| 1189 | </tr> |
| 1190 | </table> |
| 1191 | <p><var class="LITERAL">waddch()</var> is similar to <var class= |
| 1192 | "LITERAL">addch()</var>, except that it adds a character into the |
| 1193 | given window. (Note that <var class="LITERAL">addch()</var> adds a |
| 1194 | character into the window <var class="LITERAL">stdscr</var>.)</p> |
| 1195 | <p>In a similar fashion <var class="LITERAL">mvwaddch()</var> |
| 1196 | function is used to add a character into the given window at the |
| 1197 | given coordinates.</p> |
| 1198 | <p>Now, we are familiar with the basic output function <var class= |
| 1199 | "LITERAL">addch()</var>. But, if we want to print a string, it |
| 1200 | would be very annoying to print it character by character. |
| 1201 | Fortunately, <var class="LITERAL">ncurses</var> provides |
| 1202 | <var class="LITERAL">printf</var><em>-like</em> or <var class= |
| 1203 | "LITERAL">puts</var><em>-like</em> functions.</p> |
| 1204 | </div> |
| 1205 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1206 | <hr> |
| 1207 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="PRINTWCLASS" id="PRINTWCLASS">6.3. |
| 1208 | printw() class of functions</a></h3> |
| 1209 | <p>These functions are similar to <var class= |
| 1210 | "LITERAL">printf()</var> with the added capability of printing at |
| 1211 | any position on the screen.</p> |
| 1212 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 1213 | <hr> |
| 1214 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="PRINTWMVPRINTW" id= |
| 1215 | "PRINTWMVPRINTW">6.3.1. printw() and mvprintw</a></h4> |
| 1216 | <p>These two functions work much like <var class= |
| 1217 | "LITERAL">printf()</var>. <var class="LITERAL">mvprintw()</var> can |
| 1218 | be used to move the cursor to a position and then print. If you |
| 1219 | want to move the cursor first and then print using <var class= |
| 1220 | "LITERAL">printw()</var> function, use <var class= |
| 1221 | "LITERAL">move()</var> first and then use <var class= |
| 1222 | "LITERAL">printw()</var> though I see no point why one should avoid |
| 1223 | using <var class="LITERAL">mvprintw()</var>, you have the |
| 1224 | flexibility to manipulate.</p> |
| 1225 | </div> |
| 1226 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 1227 | <hr> |
| 1228 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="WPRINTWMVWPRINTW" id= |
| 1229 | "WPRINTWMVWPRINTW">6.3.2. wprintw() and mvwprintw</a></h4> |
| 1230 | <p>These two functions are similar to above two except that they |
| 1231 | print in the corresponding window given as argument.</p> |
| 1232 | </div> |
| 1233 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 1234 | <hr> |
| 1235 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="VWPRINTW" id="VWPRINTW">6.3.3. |
| 1236 | vwprintw()</a></h4> |
| 1237 | <p>This function is similar to <var class= |
| 1238 | "LITERAL">vprintf()</var>. This can be used when variable number of |
| 1239 | arguments are to be printed.</p> |
| 1240 | </div> |
| 1241 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 1242 | <hr> |
| 1243 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="SIMPLEPRINTWEX" id= |
| 1244 | "SIMPLEPRINTWEX">6.3.4. A Simple printw example</a></h4> |
| 1245 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="BPREX" id="BPREX"></a> |
| 1246 | <p><b>Example 3. A Simple printw example</b></p> |
| 1247 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1248 | <tr> |
| 1249 | <td> |
| 1250 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1251 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 1252 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <ncurses.h> /* ncurses.h includes stdio.h */ |
| 1253 | #include <string.h> |
| 1254 | |
| 1255 | int main() |
| 1256 | { |
| 1257 | char mesg[]="Just a string"; /* message to be appeared on the screen */ |
| 1258 | int row,col; /* to store the number of rows and * |
| 1259 | * the number of colums of the screen */ |
| 1260 | initscr(); /* start the curses mode */ |
| 1261 | getmaxyx(stdscr,row,col); /* get the number of rows and columns */ |
| 1262 | mvprintw(row/2,(col-strlen(mesg))/2,"%s",mesg); |
| 1263 | /* print the message at the center of the screen */ |
| 1264 | mvprintw(row-2,0,"This screen has %d rows and %d columns\n",row,col); |
| 1265 | printw("Try resizing your window(if possible) and then run this program again"); |
| 1266 | refresh(); |
| 1267 | getch(); |
| 1268 | endwin(); |
| 1269 | |
| 1270 | return 0; |
| 1271 | }</span></font> |
| 1272 | </pre></td> |
| 1273 | </tr> |
| 1274 | </table> |
| 1275 | </div> |
| 1276 | <p>Above program demonstrates how easy it is to use <var class= |
| 1277 | "LITERAL">printw</var>. You just feed the coordinates and the |
| 1278 | message to be appeared on the screen, then it does what you |
| 1279 | want.</p> |
| 1280 | <p>The above program introduces us to a new function <var class= |
| 1281 | "LITERAL">getmaxyx()</var>, a macro defined in <var class= |
| 1282 | "LITERAL">ncurses.h</var>. It gives the number of columns and the |
| 1283 | number of rows in a given window. <var class= |
| 1284 | "LITERAL">getmaxyx()</var> does this by updating the variables |
| 1285 | given to it. Since <var class="LITERAL">getmaxyx()</var> is not a |
| 1286 | function we don't pass pointers to it, we just give two integer |
| 1287 | variables.</p> |
| 1288 | </div> |
| 1289 | </div> |
| 1290 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1291 | <hr> |
| 1292 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="ADDSTRCLASS" id="ADDSTRCLASS">6.4. |
| 1293 | addstr() class of functions</a></h3> |
| 1294 | <p><var class="LITERAL">addstr()</var> is used to put a character |
| 1295 | string into a given window. This function is similar to calling |
| 1296 | <var class="LITERAL">addch()</var> once for each character in a |
| 1297 | given string. This is true for all output functions. There are |
| 1298 | other functions from this family such as <var class= |
| 1299 | "LITERAL">mvaddstr(),mvwaddstr()</var> and <var class= |
| 1300 | "LITERAL">waddstr()</var>, which obey the naming convention of |
| 1301 | curses.(e.g. mvaddstr() is similar to the respective calls move() |
| 1302 | and then addstr().) Another function of this family is addnstr(), |
| 1303 | which takes an integer parameter(say n) additionally. This function |
| 1304 | puts at most n characters into the screen. If n is negative, then |
| 1305 | the entire string will be added.</p> |
| 1306 | </div> |
| 1307 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1308 | <hr> |
| 1309 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="ACAUTION" id="ACAUTION">6.5. A word of |
| 1310 | caution</a></h3> |
| 1311 | <p>All these functions take y co-ordinate first and then x in their |
| 1312 | arguments. A common mistake by beginners is to pass x,y in that |
| 1313 | order. If you are doing too many manipulations of (y,x) |
| 1314 | co-ordinates, think of dividing the screen into windows and |
| 1315 | manipulate each one separately. Windows are explained in the |
| 1316 | <a href="#WINDOWS">windows</a> section.</p> |
| 1317 | </div> |
| 1318 | </div> |
| 1319 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 1320 | <hr> |
| 1321 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="SCANW" id="SCANW">7. Input |
| 1322 | functions</a></h2> |
| 1323 | <p>Well, printing without taking input, is boring. Let's see |
| 1324 | functions which allow us to get input from user. These functions |
| 1325 | also can be divided into three categories.</p> |
| 1326 | <ol type="1"> |
| 1327 | <li> |
| 1328 | <p>getch() class: Get a character</p> |
| 1329 | </li> |
| 1330 | <li> |
| 1331 | <p>scanw() class: Get formatted input</p> |
| 1332 | </li> |
| 1333 | <li> |
| 1334 | <p>getstr() class: Get strings</p> |
| 1335 | </li> |
| 1336 | </ol> |
| 1337 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1338 | <hr> |
| 1339 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="GETCHCLASS" id="GETCHCLASS">7.1. getch() |
| 1340 | class of functions</a></h3> |
| 1341 | <p>These functions read a single character from the terminal. But |
| 1342 | there are several subtle facts to consider. For example if you |
| 1343 | don't use the function cbreak(), curses will not read your input |
| 1344 | characters contiguously but will begin read them only after a new |
| 1345 | line or an EOF is encountered. In order to avoid this, the cbreak() |
| 1346 | function must used so that characters are immediately available to |
| 1347 | your program. Another widely used function is noecho(). As the name |
| 1348 | suggests, when this function is set (used), the characters that are |
| 1349 | keyed in by the user will not show up on the screen. The two |
| 1350 | functions cbreak() and noecho() are typical examples of key |
| 1351 | management. Functions of this genre are explained in the <a href= |
| 1352 | "#KEYS">key management section</a> .</p> |
| 1353 | </div> |
| 1354 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1355 | <hr> |
| 1356 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="SCANWCLASS" id="SCANWCLASS">7.2. scanw() |
| 1357 | class of functions</a></h3> |
| 1358 | <p>These functions are similar to <var class= |
| 1359 | "LITERAL">scanf()</var> with the added capability of getting the |
| 1360 | input from any location on the screen.</p> |
| 1361 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 1362 | <hr> |
| 1363 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="SCANWMVSCANW" id="SCANWMVSCANW">7.2.1. |
| 1364 | scanw() and mvscanw</a></h4> |
| 1365 | <p>The usage of these functions is similar to that of <var class= |
| 1366 | "LITERAL">sscanf()</var>, where the line to be scanned is provided |
| 1367 | by <var class="LITERAL">wgetstr()</var> function. That is, these |
| 1368 | functions call to <var class="LITERAL">wgetstr()</var> |
| 1369 | function(explained below) and uses the resulting line for a |
| 1370 | scan.</p> |
| 1371 | </div> |
| 1372 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 1373 | <hr> |
| 1374 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="WSCANWMVWSCANW" id= |
| 1375 | "WSCANWMVWSCANW">7.2.2. wscanw() and mvwscanw()</a></h4> |
| 1376 | <p>These are similar to above two functions except that they read |
| 1377 | from a window, which is supplied as one of the arguments to these |
| 1378 | functions.</p> |
| 1379 | </div> |
| 1380 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 1381 | <hr> |
| 1382 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="VWSCANW" id="VWSCANW">7.2.3. |
| 1383 | vwscanw()</a></h4> |
| 1384 | <p>This function is similar to <var class="LITERAL">vscanf()</var>. |
| 1385 | This can be used when a variable number of arguments are to be |
| 1386 | scanned.</p> |
| 1387 | </div> |
| 1388 | </div> |
| 1389 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1390 | <hr> |
| 1391 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="GETSTRCLASS" id="GETSTRCLASS">7.3. |
| 1392 | getstr() class of functions</a></h3> |
| 1393 | <p>These functions are used to get strings from the terminal. In |
| 1394 | essence, this function performs the same task as would be achieved |
| 1395 | by a series of calls to <var class="LITERAL">getch()</var> until a |
| 1396 | newline, carriage return, or end-of-file is received. The resulting |
| 1397 | string of characters are pointed to by <var class= |
| 1398 | "LITERAL">str</var>, which is a character pointer provided by the |
| 1399 | user.</p> |
| 1400 | </div> |
| 1401 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1402 | <hr> |
| 1403 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="GETSTREX" id="GETSTREX">7.4. Some |
| 1404 | examples</a></h3> |
| 1405 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="BSCEX" id="BSCEX"></a> |
| 1406 | <p><b>Example 4. A Simple scanw example</b></p> |
| 1407 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1408 | <tr> |
| 1409 | <td> |
| 1410 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1411 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 1412 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <ncurses.h> /* ncurses.h includes stdio.h */ |
| 1413 | #include <string.h> |
| 1414 | |
| 1415 | int main() |
| 1416 | { |
| 1417 | char mesg[]="Enter a string: "; /* message to be appeared on the screen */ |
| 1418 | char str[80]; |
| 1419 | int row,col; /* to store the number of rows and * |
| 1420 | * the number of colums of the screen */ |
| 1421 | initscr(); /* start the curses mode */ |
| 1422 | getmaxyx(stdscr,row,col); /* get the number of rows and columns */ |
| 1423 | mvprintw(row/2,(col-strlen(mesg))/2,"%s",mesg); |
| 1424 | /* print the message at the center of the screen */ |
| 1425 | getstr(str); |
| 1426 | mvprintw(LINES - 2, 0, "You Entered: %s", str); |
| 1427 | getch(); |
| 1428 | endwin(); |
| 1429 | |
| 1430 | return 0; |
| 1431 | }</span></font> |
| 1432 | </pre></td> |
| 1433 | </tr> |
| 1434 | </table> |
| 1435 | </div> |
| 1436 | </div> |
| 1437 | </div> |
| 1438 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 1439 | <hr> |
| 1440 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="ATTRIB" id="ATTRIB">8. |
| 1441 | Attributes</a></h2> |
| 1442 | <p>We have seen an example of how attributes can be used to print |
| 1443 | characters with some special effects. Attributes, when set |
| 1444 | prudently, can present information in an easy, understandable |
| 1445 | manner. The following program takes a C file as input and prints |
| 1446 | the file with comments in bold. Scan through the code.</p> |
| 1447 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="BSIAT" id="BSIAT"></a> |
| 1448 | <p><b>Example 5. A Simple Attributes example</b></p> |
| 1449 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1450 | <tr> |
| 1451 | <td> |
| 1452 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1453 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 1454 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">/* pager functionality by Joseph Spainhour" <spainhou@bellsouth.net> */ |
| 1455 | #include <ncurses.h> |
| 1456 | #include <stdlib.h> |
| 1457 | |
| 1458 | int main(int argc, char *argv[]) |
| 1459 | { |
| 1460 | int ch, prev, row, col; |
| 1461 | prev = EOF; |
| 1462 | FILE *fp; |
| 1463 | int y, x; |
| 1464 | |
| 1465 | if(argc != 2) |
| 1466 | { |
| 1467 | printf("Usage: %s <a c file name>\n", argv[0]); |
| 1468 | exit(1); |
| 1469 | } |
| 1470 | fp = fopen(argv[1], "r"); |
| 1471 | if(fp == NULL) |
| 1472 | { |
| 1473 | perror("Cannot open input file"); |
| 1474 | exit(1); |
| 1475 | } |
| 1476 | initscr(); /* Start curses mode */ |
| 1477 | getmaxyx(stdscr, row, col); /* find the boundaries of the screeen */ |
| 1478 | while((ch = fgetc(fp)) != EOF) /* read the file till we reach the end */ |
| 1479 | { |
| 1480 | getyx(stdscr, y, x); /* get the current curser position */ |
| 1481 | if(y == (row - 1)) /* are we are at the end of the screen */ |
| 1482 | { |
| 1483 | printw("<-Press Any Key->"); /* tell the user to press a key */ |
| 1484 | getch(); |
| 1485 | clear(); /* clear the screen */ |
| 1486 | move(0, 0); /* start at the beginning of the screen */ |
| 1487 | } |
| 1488 | if(prev == '/' && ch == '*') /* If it is / and * then only |
| 1489 | * switch bold on */ |
| 1490 | { |
| 1491 | attron(A_BOLD); /* cut bold on */ |
| 1492 | getyx(stdscr, y, x); /* get the current curser position */ |
| 1493 | move(y, x - 1); /* back up one space */ |
| 1494 | printw("%c%c", '/', ch); /* The actual printing is done here */ |
| 1495 | } |
| 1496 | else |
| 1497 | printw("%c", ch); |
| 1498 | refresh(); |
| 1499 | if(prev == '*' && ch == '/') |
| 1500 | attroff(A_BOLD); /* Switch it off once we got * |
| 1501 | * and then / */ |
| 1502 | prev = ch; |
| 1503 | } |
| 1504 | endwin(); /* End curses mode */ |
| 1505 | fclose(fp); |
| 1506 | return 0; |
| 1507 | }</span></font> |
| 1508 | </pre></td> |
| 1509 | </tr> |
| 1510 | </table> |
| 1511 | </div> |
| 1512 | <p>Don't worry about all those initialization and other crap. |
| 1513 | Concentrate on the while loop. It reads each character in the file |
| 1514 | and searches for the pattern /*. Once it spots the pattern, it |
| 1515 | switches the BOLD attribute on with <var class= |
| 1516 | "LITERAL">attron()</var> . When we get the pattern */ it is |
| 1517 | switched off by <var class="LITERAL">attroff()</var> .</p> |
| 1518 | <p>The above program also introduces us to two useful functions |
| 1519 | <var class="LITERAL">getyx()</var> and <var class= |
| 1520 | "LITERAL">move()</var>. The first function gets the co-ordinates of |
| 1521 | the present cursor into the variables y, x. Since getyx() is a |
| 1522 | macro we don't have to pass pointers to variables. The function |
| 1523 | <var class="LITERAL">move()</var> moves the cursor to the |
| 1524 | co-ordinates given to it.</p> |
| 1525 | <p>The above program is really a simple one which doesn't do much. |
| 1526 | On these lines one could write a more useful program which reads a |
| 1527 | C file, parses it and prints it in different colors. One could even |
| 1528 | extend it to other languages as well.</p> |
| 1529 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1530 | <hr> |
| 1531 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="ATTRIBDETAILS" id="ATTRIBDETAILS">8.1. |
| 1532 | The details</a></h3> |
| 1533 | <p>Let's get into more details of attributes. The functions |
| 1534 | <var class="LITERAL">attron(), attroff(), attrset()</var> , and |
| 1535 | their sister functions <var class="LITERAL">attr_get()</var> etc.. |
| 1536 | can be used to switch attributes on/off , get attributes and |
| 1537 | produce a colorful display.</p> |
| 1538 | <p>The functions attron and attroff take a bit-mask of attributes |
| 1539 | and switch them on or off, respectively. The following video |
| 1540 | attributes, which are defined in <curses.h> can be passed to |
| 1541 | these functions.</p> |
| 1542 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1543 | <tr> |
| 1544 | <td> |
| 1545 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1546 | <font color="#000000"> |
| 1547 | A_NORMAL Normal display (no highlight) |
| 1548 | A_STANDOUT Best highlighting mode of the terminal. |
| 1549 | A_UNDERLINE Underlining |
| 1550 | A_REVERSE Reverse video |
| 1551 | A_BLINK Blinking |
| 1552 | A_DIM Half bright |
| 1553 | A_BOLD Extra bright or bold |
| 1554 | A_PROTECT Protected mode |
| 1555 | A_INVIS Invisible or blank mode |
| 1556 | A_ALTCHARSET Alternate character set |
| 1557 | A_CHARTEXT Bit-mask to extract a character |
| 1558 | COLOR_PAIR(n) Color-pair number n |
| 1559 | </font> |
| 1560 | </pre></td> |
| 1561 | </tr> |
| 1562 | </table> |
| 1563 | <p>The last one is the most colorful one :-) Colors are explained |
| 1564 | in the <a href="#color" target="_top">next sections</a>.</p> |
| 1565 | <p>We can OR(|) any number of above attributes to get a combined |
| 1566 | effect. If you wanted reverse video with blinking characters you |
| 1567 | can use</p> |
| 1568 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1569 | <tr> |
| 1570 | <td> |
| 1571 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1572 | <font color="#000000"> attron(A_REVERSE | A_BLINK);</font> |
| 1573 | </pre></td> |
| 1574 | </tr> |
| 1575 | </table> |
| 1576 | </div> |
| 1577 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1578 | <hr> |
| 1579 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="ATTRONVSATTRSET" id= |
| 1580 | "ATTRONVSATTRSET">8.2. attron() vs attrset()</a></h3> |
| 1581 | <p>Then what is the difference between attron() and attrset()? |
| 1582 | attrset sets the attributes of window whereas attron just switches |
| 1583 | on the attribute given to it. So attrset() fully overrides whatever |
| 1584 | attributes the window previously had and sets it to the new |
| 1585 | attribute(s). Similarly attroff() just switches off the |
| 1586 | attribute(s) given to it as an argument. This gives us the |
| 1587 | flexibility of managing attributes easily.But if you use them |
| 1588 | carelessly you may loose track of what attributes the window has |
| 1589 | and garble the display. This is especially true while managing |
| 1590 | menus with colors and highlighting. So decide on a consistent |
| 1591 | policy and stick to it. You can always use <var class= |
| 1592 | "LITERAL">standend()</var> which is equivalent to <var class= |
| 1593 | "LITERAL">attrset(A_NORMAL)</var> which turns off all attributes |
| 1594 | and brings you to normal mode.</p> |
| 1595 | </div> |
| 1596 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1597 | <hr> |
| 1598 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="ATTR_GET" id="ATTR_GET">8.3. |
| 1599 | attr_get()</a></h3> |
| 1600 | <p>The function attr_get() gets the current attributes and color |
| 1601 | pair of the window. Though we might not use this as often as the |
| 1602 | above functions, this is useful in scanning areas of screen. Say we |
| 1603 | wanted to do some complex update on screen and we are not sure what |
| 1604 | attribute each character is associated with. Then this function can |
| 1605 | be used with either attrset or attron to produce the desired |
| 1606 | effect.</p> |
| 1607 | </div> |
| 1608 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1609 | <hr> |
| 1610 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="ATTR_FUNCS" id="ATTR_FUNCS">8.4. attr_ |
| 1611 | functions</a></h3> |
| 1612 | <p>There are series of functions like attr_set(), attr_on etc.. |
| 1613 | These are similar to above functions except that they take |
| 1614 | parameters of type <var class="LITERAL">attr_t</var>.</p> |
| 1615 | </div> |
| 1616 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1617 | <hr> |
| 1618 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="WATTRFUNCS" id="WATTRFUNCS">8.5. wattr |
| 1619 | functions</a></h3> |
| 1620 | <p>For each of the above functions we have a corresponding function |
| 1621 | with 'w' which operates on a particular window. The above functions |
| 1622 | operate on stdscr.</p> |
| 1623 | </div> |
| 1624 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1625 | <hr> |
| 1626 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="CHGAT" id="CHGAT">8.6. chgat() |
| 1627 | functions</a></h3> |
| 1628 | <p>The function chgat() is listed in the end of the man page |
| 1629 | curs_attr. It actually is a useful one. This function can be used |
| 1630 | to set attributes for a group of characters without moving. I mean |
| 1631 | it !!! without moving the cursor :-) It changes the attributes of a |
| 1632 | given number of characters starting at the current cursor |
| 1633 | location.</p> |
| 1634 | <p>We can give -1 as the character count to update till end of |
| 1635 | line. If you want to change attributes of characters from current |
| 1636 | position to end of line, just use this.</p> |
| 1637 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1638 | <tr> |
| 1639 | <td> |
| 1640 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1641 | <font color="#000000"> chgat(-1, A_REVERSE, 0, NULL);</font> |
| 1642 | </pre></td> |
| 1643 | </tr> |
| 1644 | </table> |
| 1645 | <p>This function is useful when changing attributes for characters |
| 1646 | that are already on the screen. Move to the character from which |
| 1647 | you want to change and change the attribute.</p> |
| 1648 | <p>Other functions wchgat(), mvchgat(), wchgat() behave similarly |
| 1649 | except that the w functions operate on the particular window. The |
| 1650 | mv functions first move the cursor then perform the work given to |
| 1651 | them. Actually chgat is a macro which is replaced by a wchgat() |
| 1652 | with stdscr as the window. Most of the "w-less" functions are |
| 1653 | macros.</p> |
| 1654 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="BWICH" id="BWICH"></a> |
| 1655 | <p><b>Example 6. Chgat() Usage example</b></p> |
| 1656 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1657 | <tr> |
| 1658 | <td> |
| 1659 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1660 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 1661 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <ncurses.h> |
| 1662 | |
| 1663 | int main(int argc, char *argv[]) |
| 1664 | { initscr(); /* Start curses mode */ |
| 1665 | start_color(); /* Start color functionality */ |
| 1666 | |
| 1667 | init_pair(1, COLOR_CYAN, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 1668 | printw("A Big string which i didn't care to type fully "); |
| 1669 | mvchgat(0, 0, -1, A_BLINK, 1, NULL); |
| 1670 | /* |
| 1671 | * First two parameters specify the position at which to start |
| 1672 | * Third parameter number of characters to update. -1 means till |
| 1673 | * end of line |
| 1674 | * Forth parameter is the normal attribute you wanted to give |
| 1675 | * to the charcter |
| 1676 | * Fifth is the color index. It is the index given during init_pair() |
| 1677 | * use 0 if you didn't want color |
| 1678 | * Sixth one is always NULL |
| 1679 | */ |
| 1680 | refresh(); |
| 1681 | getch(); |
| 1682 | endwin(); /* End curses mode */ |
| 1683 | return 0; |
| 1684 | }</span></font> |
| 1685 | </pre></td> |
| 1686 | </tr> |
| 1687 | </table> |
| 1688 | </div> |
| 1689 | <p>This example also introduces us to the color world of curses. |
| 1690 | Colors will be explained in detail later. Use 0 for no color.</p> |
| 1691 | </div> |
| 1692 | </div> |
| 1693 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 1694 | <hr> |
| 1695 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="WINDOWS" id="WINDOWS">9. |
| 1696 | Windows</a></h2> |
| 1697 | <p>Windows form the most important concept in curses. You have seen |
| 1698 | the standard window stdscr above where all the functions implicitly |
| 1699 | operated on this window. Now to make design even a simplest GUI, |
| 1700 | you need to resort to windows. The main reason you may want to use |
| 1701 | windows is to manipulate parts of the screen separately, for better |
| 1702 | efficiency, by updating only the windows that need to be changed |
| 1703 | and for a better design. I would say the last reason is the most |
| 1704 | important in going for windows. You should always strive for a |
| 1705 | better and easy-to-manage design in your programs. If you are |
| 1706 | writing big, complex GUIs this is of pivotal importance before you |
| 1707 | start doing anything.</p> |
| 1708 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1709 | <hr> |
| 1710 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="WINDOWBASICS" id="WINDOWBASICS">9.1. The |
| 1711 | basics</a></h3> |
| 1712 | <p>A Window can be created by calling the function <var class= |
| 1713 | "LITERAL">newwin()</var>. It doesn't create any thing on the screen |
| 1714 | actually. It allocates memory for a structure to manipulate the |
| 1715 | window and updates the structure with data regarding the window |
| 1716 | like it's size, beginy, beginx etc.. Hence in curses, a window is |
| 1717 | just an abstraction of an imaginary window, which can be |
| 1718 | manipulated independent of other parts of screen. The function |
| 1719 | newwin() returns a pointer to structure WINDOW, which can be passed |
| 1720 | to window related functions like wprintw() etc.. Finally the window |
| 1721 | can be destroyed with delwin(). It will deallocate the memory |
| 1722 | associated with the window structure.</p> |
| 1723 | </div> |
| 1724 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1725 | <hr> |
| 1726 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="LETBEWINDOW" id="LETBEWINDOW">9.2. Let |
| 1727 | there be a Window !!!</a></h3> |
| 1728 | <p>What fun is it, if a window is created and we can't see it. So |
| 1729 | the fun part begins by displaying the window. The function |
| 1730 | <var class="LITERAL">box()</var> can be used to draw a border |
| 1731 | around the window. Let's explore these functions in more detail in |
| 1732 | this example.</p> |
| 1733 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="BWIBO" id="BWIBO"></a> |
| 1734 | <p><b>Example 7. Window Border example</b></p> |
| 1735 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1736 | <tr> |
| 1737 | <td> |
| 1738 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1739 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 1740 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <ncurses.h> |
| 1741 | |
| 1742 | |
| 1743 | WINDOW *create_newwin(int height, int width, int starty, int startx); |
| 1744 | void destroy_win(WINDOW *local_win); |
| 1745 | |
| 1746 | int main(int argc, char *argv[]) |
| 1747 | { WINDOW *my_win; |
| 1748 | int startx, starty, width, height; |
| 1749 | int ch; |
| 1750 | |
| 1751 | initscr(); /* Start curses mode */ |
| 1752 | cbreak(); /* Line buffering disabled, Pass on |
| 1753 | * everty thing to me */ |
| 1754 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); /* I need that nifty F1 */ |
| 1755 | |
| 1756 | height = 3; |
| 1757 | width = 10; |
| 1758 | starty = (LINES - height) / 2; /* Calculating for a center placement */ |
| 1759 | startx = (COLS - width) / 2; /* of the window */ |
| 1760 | printw("Press F1 to exit"); |
| 1761 | refresh(); |
| 1762 | my_win = create_newwin(height, width, starty, startx); |
| 1763 | |
| 1764 | while((ch = getch()) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 1765 | { switch(ch) |
| 1766 | { case KEY_LEFT: |
| 1767 | destroy_win(my_win); |
| 1768 | my_win = create_newwin(height, width, starty,--startx); |
| 1769 | break; |
| 1770 | case KEY_RIGHT: |
| 1771 | destroy_win(my_win); |
| 1772 | my_win = create_newwin(height, width, starty,++startx); |
| 1773 | break; |
| 1774 | case KEY_UP: |
| 1775 | destroy_win(my_win); |
| 1776 | my_win = create_newwin(height, width, --starty,startx); |
| 1777 | break; |
| 1778 | case KEY_DOWN: |
| 1779 | destroy_win(my_win); |
| 1780 | my_win = create_newwin(height, width, ++starty,startx); |
| 1781 | break; |
| 1782 | } |
| 1783 | } |
| 1784 | |
| 1785 | endwin(); /* End curses mode */ |
| 1786 | return 0; |
| 1787 | } |
| 1788 | |
| 1789 | WINDOW *create_newwin(int height, int width, int starty, int startx) |
| 1790 | { WINDOW *local_win; |
| 1791 | |
| 1792 | local_win = newwin(height, width, starty, startx); |
| 1793 | box(local_win, 0 , 0); /* 0, 0 gives default characters |
| 1794 | * for the vertical and horizontal |
| 1795 | * lines */ |
| 1796 | wrefresh(local_win); /* Show that box */ |
| 1797 | |
| 1798 | return local_win; |
| 1799 | } |
| 1800 | |
| 1801 | void destroy_win(WINDOW *local_win) |
| 1802 | { |
| 1803 | /* box(local_win, ' ', ' '); : This won't produce the desired |
| 1804 | * result of erasing the window. It will leave it's four corners |
| 1805 | * and so an ugly remnant of window. |
| 1806 | */ |
| 1807 | wborder(local_win, ' ', ' ', ' ',' ',' ',' ',' ',' '); |
| 1808 | /* The parameters taken are |
| 1809 | * 1. win: the window on which to operate |
| 1810 | * 2. ls: character to be used for the left side of the window |
| 1811 | * 3. rs: character to be used for the right side of the window |
| 1812 | * 4. ts: character to be used for the top side of the window |
| 1813 | * 5. bs: character to be used for the bottom side of the window |
| 1814 | * 6. tl: character to be used for the top left corner of the window |
| 1815 | * 7. tr: character to be used for the top right corner of the window |
| 1816 | * 8. bl: character to be used for the bottom left corner of the window |
| 1817 | * 9. br: character to be used for the bottom right corner of the window |
| 1818 | */ |
| 1819 | wrefresh(local_win); |
| 1820 | delwin(local_win); |
| 1821 | }</span></font> |
| 1822 | </pre></td> |
| 1823 | </tr> |
| 1824 | </table> |
| 1825 | </div> |
| 1826 | </div> |
| 1827 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1828 | <hr> |
| 1829 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="BORDEREXEXPL" id="BORDEREXEXPL">9.3. |
| 1830 | Explanation</a></h3> |
| 1831 | <p>Don't scream. I know it's a big example. But I have to explain |
| 1832 | some important things here :-). This program creates a rectangular |
| 1833 | window that can be moved with left, right, up, down arrow keys. It |
| 1834 | repeatedly creates and destroys windows as user press a key. Don't |
| 1835 | go beyond the screen limits. Checking for those limits is left as |
| 1836 | an exercise for the reader. Let's dissect it by line by line.</p> |
| 1837 | <p>The <var class="LITERAL">create_newwin()</var> function creates |
| 1838 | a window with <var class="LITERAL">newwin()</var> and displays a |
| 1839 | border around it with box. The function <var class= |
| 1840 | "LITERAL">destroy_win()</var> first erases the window from screen |
| 1841 | by painting a border with ' ' character and then calling |
| 1842 | <var class="LITERAL">delwin()</var> to deallocate memory related to |
| 1843 | it. Depending on the key the user presses, starty or startx is |
| 1844 | changed and a new window is created.</p> |
| 1845 | <p>In the destroy_win, as you can see, I used wborder instead of |
| 1846 | box. The reason is written in the comments (You missed it. I know. |
| 1847 | Read the code :-)). wborder draws a border around the window with |
| 1848 | the characters given to it as the 4 corner points and the 4 lines. |
| 1849 | To put it clearly, if you have called wborder as below:</p> |
| 1850 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1851 | <tr> |
| 1852 | <td> |
| 1853 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1854 | <font color= |
| 1855 | "#000000"> wborder(win, '|', '|', '-', '-', '+', '+', '+', '+');</font> |
| 1856 | </pre></td> |
| 1857 | </tr> |
| 1858 | </table> |
| 1859 | <p>it produces some thing like</p> |
| 1860 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1861 | <tr> |
| 1862 | <td> |
| 1863 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1864 | <font color="#000000"> +------------+ |
| 1865 | | | |
| 1866 | | | |
| 1867 | | | |
| 1868 | | | |
| 1869 | | | |
| 1870 | | | |
| 1871 | +------------+</font> |
| 1872 | </pre></td> |
| 1873 | </tr> |
| 1874 | </table> |
| 1875 | </div> |
| 1876 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1877 | <hr> |
| 1878 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="OTHERSTUFF" id="OTHERSTUFF">9.4. The |
| 1879 | other stuff in the example</a></h3> |
| 1880 | <p>You can also see in the above examples, that I have used the |
| 1881 | variables COLS, LINES which are initialized to the screen sizes |
| 1882 | after initscr(). They can be useful in finding screen dimensions |
| 1883 | and finding the center co-ordinate of the screen as above. The |
| 1884 | function <var class="LITERAL">getch()</var> as usual gets the key |
| 1885 | from keyboard and according to the key it does the corresponding |
| 1886 | work. This type of switch- case is very common in any GUI based |
| 1887 | programs.</p> |
| 1888 | </div> |
| 1889 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 1890 | <hr> |
| 1891 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="OTHERBORDERFUNCS" id= |
| 1892 | "OTHERBORDERFUNCS">9.5. Other Border functions</a></h3> |
| 1893 | <p>Above program is grossly inefficient in that with each press of |
| 1894 | a key, a window is destroyed and another is created. So let's write |
| 1895 | a more efficient program which uses other border related |
| 1896 | functions.</p> |
| 1897 | <p>The following program uses <var class="LITERAL">mvhline()</var> |
| 1898 | and <var class="LITERAL">mvvline()</var> to achieve similar effect. |
| 1899 | These two functions are simple. They create a horizontal or |
| 1900 | vertical line of the specified length at the specified |
| 1901 | position.</p> |
| 1902 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="BOTBO" id="BOTBO"></a> |
| 1903 | <p><b>Example 8. More border functions</b></p> |
| 1904 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 1905 | <tr> |
| 1906 | <td> |
| 1907 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 1908 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 1909 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <ncurses.h> |
| 1910 | |
| 1911 | typedef struct _win_border_struct { |
| 1912 | chtype ls, rs, ts, bs, |
| 1913 | tl, tr, bl, br; |
| 1914 | }WIN_BORDER; |
| 1915 | |
| 1916 | typedef struct _WIN_struct { |
| 1917 | |
| 1918 | int startx, starty; |
| 1919 | int height, width; |
| 1920 | WIN_BORDER border; |
| 1921 | }WIN; |
| 1922 | |
| 1923 | void init_win_params(WIN *p_win); |
| 1924 | void print_win_params(WIN *p_win); |
| 1925 | void create_box(WIN *win, bool flag); |
| 1926 | |
| 1927 | int main(int argc, char *argv[]) |
| 1928 | { WIN win; |
| 1929 | int ch; |
| 1930 | |
| 1931 | initscr(); /* Start curses mode */ |
| 1932 | start_color(); /* Start the color functionality */ |
| 1933 | cbreak(); /* Line buffering disabled, Pass on |
| 1934 | * everty thing to me */ |
| 1935 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); /* I need that nifty F1 */ |
| 1936 | noecho(); |
| 1937 | init_pair(1, COLOR_CYAN, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 1938 | |
| 1939 | /* Initialize the window parameters */ |
| 1940 | init_win_params(&win); |
| 1941 | print_win_params(&win); |
| 1942 | |
| 1943 | attron(COLOR_PAIR(1)); |
| 1944 | printw("Press F1 to exit"); |
| 1945 | refresh(); |
| 1946 | attroff(COLOR_PAIR(1)); |
| 1947 | |
| 1948 | create_box(&win, TRUE); |
| 1949 | while((ch = getch()) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 1950 | { switch(ch) |
| 1951 | { case KEY_LEFT: |
| 1952 | create_box(&win, FALSE); |
| 1953 | --win.startx; |
| 1954 | create_box(&win, TRUE); |
| 1955 | break; |
| 1956 | case KEY_RIGHT: |
| 1957 | create_box(&win, FALSE); |
| 1958 | ++win.startx; |
| 1959 | create_box(&win, TRUE); |
| 1960 | break; |
| 1961 | case KEY_UP: |
| 1962 | create_box(&win, FALSE); |
| 1963 | --win.starty; |
| 1964 | create_box(&win, TRUE); |
| 1965 | break; |
| 1966 | case KEY_DOWN: |
| 1967 | create_box(&win, FALSE); |
| 1968 | ++win.starty; |
| 1969 | create_box(&win, TRUE); |
| 1970 | break; |
| 1971 | } |
| 1972 | } |
| 1973 | endwin(); /* End curses mode */ |
| 1974 | return 0; |
| 1975 | } |
| 1976 | void init_win_params(WIN *p_win) |
| 1977 | { |
| 1978 | p_win->height = 3; |
| 1979 | p_win->width = 10; |
| 1980 | p_win->starty = (LINES - p_win->height)/2; |
| 1981 | p_win->startx = (COLS - p_win->width)/2; |
| 1982 | |
| 1983 | p_win->border.ls = '|'; |
| 1984 | p_win->border.rs = '|'; |
| 1985 | p_win->border.ts = '-'; |
| 1986 | p_win->border.bs = '-'; |
| 1987 | p_win->border.tl = '+'; |
| 1988 | p_win->border.tr = '+'; |
| 1989 | p_win->border.bl = '+'; |
| 1990 | p_win->border.br = '+'; |
| 1991 | |
| 1992 | } |
| 1993 | void print_win_params(WIN *p_win) |
| 1994 | { |
| 1995 | #ifdef _DEBUG |
| 1996 | mvprintw(25, 0, "%d %d %d %d", p_win->startx, p_win->starty, |
| 1997 | p_win->width, p_win->height); |
| 1998 | refresh(); |
| 1999 | #endif |
| 2000 | } |
| 2001 | void create_box(WIN *p_win, bool flag) |
| 2002 | { int i, j; |
| 2003 | int x, y, w, h; |
| 2004 | |
| 2005 | x = p_win->startx; |
| 2006 | y = p_win->starty; |
| 2007 | w = p_win->width; |
| 2008 | h = p_win->height; |
| 2009 | |
| 2010 | if(flag == TRUE) |
| 2011 | { mvaddch(y, x, p_win->border.tl); |
| 2012 | mvaddch(y, x + w, p_win->border.tr); |
| 2013 | mvaddch(y + h, x, p_win->border.bl); |
| 2014 | mvaddch(y + h, x + w, p_win->border.br); |
| 2015 | mvhline(y, x + 1, p_win->border.ts, w - 1); |
| 2016 | mvhline(y + h, x + 1, p_win->border.bs, w - 1); |
| 2017 | mvvline(y + 1, x, p_win->border.ls, h - 1); |
| 2018 | mvvline(y + 1, x + w, p_win->border.rs, h - 1); |
| 2019 | |
| 2020 | } |
| 2021 | else |
| 2022 | for(j = y; j <= y + h; ++j) |
| 2023 | for(i = x; i <= x + w; ++i) |
| 2024 | mvaddch(j, i, ' '); |
| 2025 | |
| 2026 | refresh(); |
| 2027 | |
| 2028 | }</span></font> |
| 2029 | </pre></td> |
| 2030 | </tr> |
| 2031 | </table> |
| 2032 | </div> |
| 2033 | </div> |
| 2034 | </div> |
| 2035 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 2036 | <hr> |
| 2037 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="COLOR" id="COLOR">10. Colors</a></h2> |
| 2038 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2039 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="COLORBASICS" id="COLORBASICS">10.1. The |
| 2040 | basics</a></h3> |
| 2041 | <p>Life seems dull with no colors. Curses has a nice mechanism to |
| 2042 | handle colors. Let's get into the thick of the things with a small |
| 2043 | program.</p> |
| 2044 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="BSICO" id="BSICO"></a> |
| 2045 | <p><b>Example 9. A Simple Color example</b></p> |
| 2046 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2047 | <tr> |
| 2048 | <td> |
| 2049 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2050 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 2051 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <ncurses.h> |
| 2052 | |
| 2053 | void print_in_middle(WINDOW *win, int starty, int startx, int width, char *string); |
| 2054 | int main(int argc, char *argv[]) |
| 2055 | { initscr(); /* Start curses mode */ |
| 2056 | if(has_colors() == FALSE) |
| 2057 | { endwin(); |
| 2058 | printf("Your terminal does not support color\n"); |
| 2059 | exit(1); |
| 2060 | } |
| 2061 | start_color(); /* Start color */ |
| 2062 | init_pair(1, COLOR_RED, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 2063 | |
| 2064 | attron(COLOR_PAIR(1)); |
| 2065 | print_in_middle(stdscr, LINES / 2, 0, 0, "Viola !!! In color ..."); |
| 2066 | attroff(COLOR_PAIR(1)); |
| 2067 | getch(); |
| 2068 | endwin(); |
| 2069 | } |
| 2070 | void print_in_middle(WINDOW *win, int starty, int startx, int width, char *string) |
| 2071 | { int length, x, y; |
| 2072 | float temp; |
| 2073 | |
| 2074 | if(win == NULL) |
| 2075 | win = stdscr; |
| 2076 | getyx(win, y, x); |
| 2077 | if(startx != 0) |
| 2078 | x = startx; |
| 2079 | if(starty != 0) |
| 2080 | y = starty; |
| 2081 | if(width == 0) |
| 2082 | width = 80; |
| 2083 | |
| 2084 | length = strlen(string); |
| 2085 | temp = (width - length)/ 2; |
| 2086 | x = startx + (int)temp; |
| 2087 | mvwprintw(win, y, x, "%s", string); |
| 2088 | refresh(); |
| 2089 | } |
| 2090 | </span></font> |
| 2091 | </pre></td> |
| 2092 | </tr> |
| 2093 | </table> |
| 2094 | </div> |
| 2095 | <p>As you can see, to start using color, you should first call the |
| 2096 | function <var class="LITERAL">start_color()</var>. After that, you |
| 2097 | can use color capabilities of your terminals using various |
| 2098 | functions. To find out whether a terminal has color capabilities or |
| 2099 | not, you can use <var class="LITERAL">has_colors()</var> function, |
| 2100 | which returns FALSE if the terminal does not support color.</p> |
| 2101 | <p>Curses initializes all the colors supported by terminal when |
| 2102 | start_color() is called. These can be accessed by the define |
| 2103 | constants like <var class="LITERAL">COLOR_BLACK</var> etc. Now to |
| 2104 | actually start using colors, you have to define pairs. Colors are |
| 2105 | always used in pairs. That means you have to use the function |
| 2106 | <var class="LITERAL">init_pair()</var> to define the foreground and |
| 2107 | background for the pair number you give. After that that pair |
| 2108 | number can be used as a normal attribute with <var class= |
| 2109 | "LITERAL">COLOR_PAIR()</var>function. This may seem to be |
| 2110 | cumbersome at first. But this elegant solution allows us to manage |
| 2111 | color pairs very easily. To appreciate it, you have to look into |
| 2112 | the the source code of "dialog", a utility for displaying dialog |
| 2113 | boxes from shell scripts. The developers have defined foreground |
| 2114 | and background combinations for all the colors they might need and |
| 2115 | initialized at the beginning. This makes it very easy to set |
| 2116 | attributes just by accessing a pair which we already have defined |
| 2117 | as a constant.</p> |
| 2118 | <p>The following colors are defined in <var class= |
| 2119 | "LITERAL">curses.h</var>. You can use these as parameters for |
| 2120 | various color functions.</p> |
| 2121 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2122 | <tr> |
| 2123 | <td> |
| 2124 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2125 | <font color="#000000"> COLOR_BLACK 0 |
| 2126 | COLOR_RED 1 |
| 2127 | COLOR_GREEN 2 |
| 2128 | COLOR_YELLOW 3 |
| 2129 | COLOR_BLUE 4 |
| 2130 | COLOR_MAGENTA 5 |
| 2131 | COLOR_CYAN 6 |
| 2132 | COLOR_WHITE 7</font> |
| 2133 | </pre></td> |
| 2134 | </tr> |
| 2135 | </table> |
| 2136 | </div> |
| 2137 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2138 | <hr> |
| 2139 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="CHANGECOLORDEFS" id= |
| 2140 | "CHANGECOLORDEFS">10.2. Changing Color Definitions</a></h3> |
| 2141 | <p>The function <var class="LITERAL">init_color()</var>can be used |
| 2142 | to change the rgb values for the colors defined by curses |
| 2143 | initially. Say you wanted to lighten the intensity of red color by |
| 2144 | a minuscule. Then you can use this function as</p> |
| 2145 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2146 | <tr> |
| 2147 | <td> |
| 2148 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2149 | <font color="#000000"> init_color(COLOR_RED, 700, 0, 0); |
| 2150 | /* param 1 : color name |
| 2151 | * param 2, 3, 4 : rgb content min = 0, max = 1000 */</font> |
| 2152 | </pre></td> |
| 2153 | </tr> |
| 2154 | </table> |
| 2155 | <p>If your terminal cannot change the color definitions, the |
| 2156 | function returns ERR. The function <var class= |
| 2157 | "LITERAL">can_change_color()</var> can be used to find out whether |
| 2158 | the terminal has the capability of changing color content or not. |
| 2159 | The rgb content is scaled from 0 to 1000. Initially RED color is |
| 2160 | defined with content 1000(r), 0(g), 0(b).</p> |
| 2161 | </div> |
| 2162 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2163 | <hr> |
| 2164 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="COLORCONTENT" id="COLORCONTENT">10.3. |
| 2165 | Color Content</a></h3> |
| 2166 | <p>The functions <var class="LITERAL">color_content()</var> and |
| 2167 | <var class="LITERAL">pair_content()</var> can be used to find the |
| 2168 | color content and foreground, background combination for the |
| 2169 | pair.</p> |
| 2170 | </div> |
| 2171 | </div> |
| 2172 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 2173 | <hr> |
| 2174 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="KEYS" id="KEYS">11. Interfacing with the |
| 2175 | key board</a></h2> |
| 2176 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2177 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="KEYSBASICS" id="KEYSBASICS">11.1. The |
| 2178 | Basics</a></h3> |
| 2179 | <p>No GUI is complete without a strong user interface and to |
| 2180 | interact with the user, a curses program should be sensitive to key |
| 2181 | presses or the mouse actions done by the user. Let's deal with the |
| 2182 | keys first.</p> |
| 2183 | <p>As you have seen in almost all of the above examples, it's very |
| 2184 | easy to get key input from the user. A simple way of getting key |
| 2185 | presses is to use <var class="LITERAL">getch()</var> function. The |
| 2186 | cbreak mode should be enabled to read keys when you are interested |
| 2187 | in reading individual key hits rather than complete lines of text |
| 2188 | (which usually end with a carriage return). keypad should be |
| 2189 | enabled to get the Functions keys, arrow keys etc. See the |
| 2190 | initialization section for details.</p> |
| 2191 | <p><var class="LITERAL">getch()</var> returns an integer |
| 2192 | corresponding to the key pressed. If it is a normal character, the |
| 2193 | integer value will be equivalent to the character. Otherwise it |
| 2194 | returns a number which can be matched with the constants defined in |
| 2195 | <var class="LITERAL">curses.h</var>. For example if the user |
| 2196 | presses F1, the integer returned is 265. This can be checked using |
| 2197 | the macro KEY_F() defined in curses.h. This makes reading keys |
| 2198 | portable and easy to manage.</p> |
| 2199 | <p>For example, if you call getch() like this</p> |
| 2200 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2201 | <tr> |
| 2202 | <td> |
| 2203 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2204 | <font color="#000000"> int ch; |
| 2205 | |
| 2206 | ch = getch();</font> |
| 2207 | </pre></td> |
| 2208 | </tr> |
| 2209 | </table> |
| 2210 | <p>getch() will wait for the user to press a key, (unless you |
| 2211 | specified a timeout) and when user presses a key, the corresponding |
| 2212 | integer is returned. Then you can check the value returned with the |
| 2213 | constants defined in curses.h to match against the keys you |
| 2214 | want.</p> |
| 2215 | <p>The following code piece will do that job.</p> |
| 2216 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2217 | <tr> |
| 2218 | <td> |
| 2219 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2220 | <font color="#000000"> if(ch == KEY_LEFT) |
| 2221 | printw("Left arrow is pressed\n");</font> |
| 2222 | </pre></td> |
| 2223 | </tr> |
| 2224 | </table> |
| 2225 | <p>Let's write a small program which creates a menu which can be |
| 2226 | navigated by up and down arrows.</p> |
| 2227 | </div> |
| 2228 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2229 | <hr> |
| 2230 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="SIMPLEKEYEX" id="SIMPLEKEYEX">11.2. A |
| 2231 | Simple Key Usage example</a></h3> |
| 2232 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="BSIKE" id="BSIKE"></a> |
| 2233 | <p><b>Example 10. A Simple Key Usage example</b></p> |
| 2234 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2235 | <tr> |
| 2236 | <td> |
| 2237 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2238 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 2239 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <stdio.h> |
| 2240 | #include <ncurses.h> |
| 2241 | |
| 2242 | #define WIDTH 30 |
| 2243 | #define HEIGHT 10 |
| 2244 | |
| 2245 | int startx = 0; |
| 2246 | int starty = 0; |
| 2247 | |
| 2248 | char *choices[] = { |
| 2249 | "Choice 1", |
| 2250 | "Choice 2", |
| 2251 | "Choice 3", |
| 2252 | "Choice 4", |
| 2253 | "Exit", |
| 2254 | }; |
| 2255 | int n_choices = sizeof(choices) / sizeof(char *); |
| 2256 | void print_menu(WINDOW *menu_win, int highlight); |
| 2257 | |
| 2258 | int main() |
| 2259 | { WINDOW *menu_win; |
| 2260 | int highlight = 1; |
| 2261 | int choice = 0; |
| 2262 | int c; |
| 2263 | |
| 2264 | initscr(); |
| 2265 | clear(); |
| 2266 | noecho(); |
| 2267 | cbreak(); /* Line buffering disabled. pass on everything */ |
| 2268 | startx = (80 - WIDTH) / 2; |
| 2269 | starty = (24 - HEIGHT) / 2; |
| 2270 | |
| 2271 | menu_win = newwin(HEIGHT, WIDTH, starty, startx); |
| 2272 | keypad(menu_win, TRUE); |
| 2273 | mvprintw(0, 0, "Use arrow keys to go up and down, Press enter to select a choice"); |
| 2274 | refresh(); |
| 2275 | print_menu(menu_win, highlight); |
| 2276 | while(1) |
| 2277 | { c = wgetch(menu_win); |
| 2278 | switch(c) |
| 2279 | { case KEY_UP: |
| 2280 | if(highlight == 1) |
| 2281 | highlight = n_choices; |
| 2282 | else |
| 2283 | --highlight; |
| 2284 | break; |
| 2285 | case KEY_DOWN: |
| 2286 | if(highlight == n_choices) |
| 2287 | highlight = 1; |
| 2288 | else |
| 2289 | ++highlight; |
| 2290 | break; |
| 2291 | case 10: |
| 2292 | choice = highlight; |
| 2293 | break; |
| 2294 | default: |
| 2295 | mvprintw(24, 0, "Charcter pressed is = %3d Hopefully it can be printed as '%c'", c, c); |
| 2296 | refresh(); |
| 2297 | break; |
| 2298 | } |
| 2299 | print_menu(menu_win, highlight); |
| 2300 | if(choice != 0) /* User did a choice come out of the infinite loop */ |
| 2301 | break; |
| 2302 | } |
| 2303 | mvprintw(23, 0, "You chose choice %d with choice string %s\n", choice, choices[choice - 1]); |
| 2304 | clrtoeol(); |
| 2305 | refresh(); |
| 2306 | endwin(); |
| 2307 | return 0; |
| 2308 | } |
| 2309 | |
| 2310 | |
| 2311 | void print_menu(WINDOW *menu_win, int highlight) |
| 2312 | { |
| 2313 | int x, y, i; |
| 2314 | |
| 2315 | x = 2; |
| 2316 | y = 2; |
| 2317 | box(menu_win, 0, 0); |
| 2318 | for(i = 0; i < n_choices; ++i) |
| 2319 | { if(highlight == i + 1) /* High light the present choice */ |
| 2320 | { wattron(menu_win, A_REVERSE); |
| 2321 | mvwprintw(menu_win, y, x, "%s", choices[i]); |
| 2322 | wattroff(menu_win, A_REVERSE); |
| 2323 | } |
| 2324 | else |
| 2325 | mvwprintw(menu_win, y, x, "%s", choices[i]); |
| 2326 | ++y; |
| 2327 | } |
| 2328 | wrefresh(menu_win); |
| 2329 | } |
| 2330 | </span></font> |
| 2331 | </pre></td> |
| 2332 | </tr> |
| 2333 | </table> |
| 2334 | </div> |
| 2335 | </div> |
| 2336 | </div> |
| 2337 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 2338 | <hr> |
| 2339 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="MOUSE" id="MOUSE">12. Interfacing with |
| 2340 | the mouse</a></h2> |
| 2341 | <p>Now that you have seen how to get keys, lets do the same thing |
| 2342 | from mouse. Usually each UI allows the user to interact with both |
| 2343 | keyboard and mouse.</p> |
| 2344 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2345 | <hr> |
| 2346 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="MOUSEBASICS" id="MOUSEBASICS">12.1. The |
| 2347 | Basics</a></h3> |
| 2348 | <p>Before you do any thing else, the events you want to receive |
| 2349 | have to be enabled with <var class="LITERAL">mousemask()</var>.</p> |
| 2350 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2351 | <tr> |
| 2352 | <td> |
| 2353 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2354 | <font color= |
| 2355 | "#000000"> mousemask( mmask_t newmask, /* The events you want to listen to */ |
| 2356 | mmask_t *oldmask) /* The old events mask */</font> |
| 2357 | </pre></td> |
| 2358 | </tr> |
| 2359 | </table> |
| 2360 | <p>The first parameter to above function is a bit mask of events |
| 2361 | you would like to listen. By default, all the events are turned |
| 2362 | off. The bit mask <var class="LITERAL">ALL_MOUSE_EVENTS</var> can |
| 2363 | be used to get all the events.</p> |
| 2364 | <p>The following are all the event masks:</p> |
| 2365 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2366 | <tr> |
| 2367 | <td> |
| 2368 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2369 | <font color="#000000"> Name Description |
| 2370 | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2371 | BUTTON1_PRESSED mouse button 1 down |
| 2372 | BUTTON1_RELEASED mouse button 1 up |
| 2373 | BUTTON1_CLICKED mouse button 1 clicked |
| 2374 | BUTTON1_DOUBLE_CLICKED mouse button 1 double clicked |
| 2375 | BUTTON1_TRIPLE_CLICKED mouse button 1 triple clicked |
| 2376 | BUTTON2_PRESSED mouse button 2 down |
| 2377 | BUTTON2_RELEASED mouse button 2 up |
| 2378 | BUTTON2_CLICKED mouse button 2 clicked |
| 2379 | BUTTON2_DOUBLE_CLICKED mouse button 2 double clicked |
| 2380 | BUTTON2_TRIPLE_CLICKED mouse button 2 triple clicked |
| 2381 | BUTTON3_PRESSED mouse button 3 down |
| 2382 | BUTTON3_RELEASED mouse button 3 up |
| 2383 | BUTTON3_CLICKED mouse button 3 clicked |
| 2384 | BUTTON3_DOUBLE_CLICKED mouse button 3 double clicked |
| 2385 | BUTTON3_TRIPLE_CLICKED mouse button 3 triple clicked |
| 2386 | BUTTON4_PRESSED mouse button 4 down |
| 2387 | BUTTON4_RELEASED mouse button 4 up |
| 2388 | BUTTON4_CLICKED mouse button 4 clicked |
| 2389 | BUTTON4_DOUBLE_CLICKED mouse button 4 double clicked |
| 2390 | BUTTON4_TRIPLE_CLICKED mouse button 4 triple clicked |
| 2391 | BUTTON_SHIFT shift was down during button state change |
| 2392 | BUTTON_CTRL control was down during button state change |
| 2393 | BUTTON_ALT alt was down during button state change |
| 2394 | ALL_MOUSE_EVENTS report all button state changes |
| 2395 | REPORT_MOUSE_POSITION report mouse movement</font> |
| 2396 | </pre></td> |
| 2397 | </tr> |
| 2398 | </table> |
| 2399 | </div> |
| 2400 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2401 | <hr> |
| 2402 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="GETTINGEVENTS" id="GETTINGEVENTS">12.2. |
| 2403 | Getting the events</a></h3> |
| 2404 | <p>Once a class of mouse events have been enabled, getch() class of |
| 2405 | functions return KEY_MOUSE every time some mouse event happens. |
| 2406 | Then the mouse event can be retrieved with <var class= |
| 2407 | "LITERAL">getmouse()</var>.</p> |
| 2408 | <p>The code approximately looks like this:</p> |
| 2409 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2410 | <tr> |
| 2411 | <td> |
| 2412 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2413 | <font color="#000000"> MEVENT event; |
| 2414 | |
| 2415 | ch = getch(); |
| 2416 | if(ch == KEY_MOUSE) |
| 2417 | if(getmouse(&event) == OK) |
| 2418 | . /* Do some thing with the event */ |
| 2419 | . |
| 2420 | .</font> |
| 2421 | </pre></td> |
| 2422 | </tr> |
| 2423 | </table> |
| 2424 | <p>getmouse() returns the event into the pointer given to it. It's |
| 2425 | a structure which contains</p> |
| 2426 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2427 | <tr> |
| 2428 | <td> |
| 2429 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2430 | <font color="#000000"> typedef struct |
| 2431 | { |
| 2432 | short id; /* ID to distinguish multiple devices */ |
| 2433 | int x, y, z; /* event coordinates */ |
| 2434 | mmask_t bstate; /* button state bits */ |
| 2435 | } </font> |
| 2436 | </pre></td> |
| 2437 | </tr> |
| 2438 | </table> |
| 2439 | <p>The <var class="LITERAL">bstate</var> is the main variable we |
| 2440 | are interested in. It tells the button state of the mouse.</p> |
| 2441 | <p>Then with a code snippet like the following, we can find out |
| 2442 | what happened.</p> |
| 2443 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2444 | <tr> |
| 2445 | <td> |
| 2446 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2447 | <font color="#000000"> if(event.bstate & BUTTON1_PRESSED) |
| 2448 | printw("Left Button Pressed");</font> |
| 2449 | </pre></td> |
| 2450 | </tr> |
| 2451 | </table> |
| 2452 | </div> |
| 2453 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2454 | <hr> |
| 2455 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="MOUSETOGETHER" id="MOUSETOGETHER">12.3. |
| 2456 | Putting it all Together</a></h3> |
| 2457 | <p>That's pretty much interfacing with mouse. Let's create the same |
| 2458 | menu and enable mouse interaction. To make things simpler, key |
| 2459 | handling is removed.</p> |
| 2460 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="BMOME" id="BMOME"></a> |
| 2461 | <p><b>Example 11. Access the menu with mouse !!!</b></p> |
| 2462 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2463 | <tr> |
| 2464 | <td> |
| 2465 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2466 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 2467 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <ncurses.h> |
| 2468 | |
| 2469 | #define WIDTH 30 |
| 2470 | #define HEIGHT 10 |
| 2471 | |
| 2472 | int startx = 0; |
| 2473 | int starty = 0; |
| 2474 | |
| 2475 | char *choices[] = { "Choice 1", |
| 2476 | "Choice 2", |
| 2477 | "Choice 3", |
| 2478 | "Choice 4", |
| 2479 | "Exit", |
| 2480 | }; |
| 2481 | |
| 2482 | int n_choices = sizeof(choices) / sizeof(char *); |
| 2483 | |
| 2484 | void print_menu(WINDOW *menu_win, int highlight); |
| 2485 | void report_choice(int mouse_x, int mouse_y, int *p_choice); |
| 2486 | |
| 2487 | int main() |
| 2488 | { int c, choice = 0; |
| 2489 | WINDOW *menu_win; |
| 2490 | MEVENT event; |
| 2491 | |
| 2492 | /* Initialize curses */ |
| 2493 | initscr(); |
| 2494 | clear(); |
| 2495 | noecho(); |
| 2496 | cbreak(); //Line buffering disabled. pass on everything |
| 2497 | |
| 2498 | /* Try to put the window in the middle of screen */ |
| 2499 | startx = (80 - WIDTH) / 2; |
| 2500 | starty = (24 - HEIGHT) / 2; |
| 2501 | |
| 2502 | attron(A_REVERSE); |
| 2503 | mvprintw(23, 1, "Click on Exit to quit (Works best in a virtual console)"); |
| 2504 | refresh(); |
| 2505 | attroff(A_REVERSE); |
| 2506 | |
| 2507 | /* Print the menu for the first time */ |
| 2508 | menu_win = newwin(HEIGHT, WIDTH, starty, startx); |
| 2509 | print_menu(menu_win, 1); |
| 2510 | /* Get all the mouse events */ |
| 2511 | mousemask(ALL_MOUSE_EVENTS, NULL); |
| 2512 | |
| 2513 | while(1) |
| 2514 | { c = wgetch(menu_win); |
| 2515 | switch(c) |
| 2516 | { case KEY_MOUSE: |
| 2517 | if(getmouse(&event) == OK) |
| 2518 | { /* When the user clicks left mouse button */ |
| 2519 | if(event.bstate & BUTTON1_PRESSED) |
| 2520 | { report_choice(event.x + 1, event.y + 1, &choice); |
| 2521 | if(choice == -1) //Exit chosen |
| 2522 | goto end; |
| 2523 | mvprintw(22, 1, "Choice made is : %d String Chosen is \"%10s\"", choice, choices[choice - 1]); |
| 2524 | refresh(); |
| 2525 | } |
| 2526 | } |
| 2527 | print_menu(menu_win, choice); |
| 2528 | break; |
| 2529 | } |
| 2530 | } |
| 2531 | end: |
| 2532 | endwin(); |
| 2533 | return 0; |
| 2534 | } |
| 2535 | |
| 2536 | |
| 2537 | void print_menu(WINDOW *menu_win, int highlight) |
| 2538 | { |
| 2539 | int x, y, i; |
| 2540 | |
| 2541 | x = 2; |
| 2542 | y = 2; |
| 2543 | box(menu_win, 0, 0); |
| 2544 | for(i = 0; i < n_choices; ++i) |
| 2545 | { if(highlight == i + 1) |
| 2546 | { wattron(menu_win, A_REVERSE); |
| 2547 | mvwprintw(menu_win, y, x, "%s", choices[i]); |
| 2548 | wattroff(menu_win, A_REVERSE); |
| 2549 | } |
| 2550 | else |
| 2551 | mvwprintw(menu_win, y, x, "%s", choices[i]); |
| 2552 | ++y; |
| 2553 | } |
| 2554 | wrefresh(menu_win); |
| 2555 | } |
| 2556 | |
| 2557 | /* Report the choice according to mouse position */ |
| 2558 | void report_choice(int mouse_x, int mouse_y, int *p_choice) |
| 2559 | { int i,j, choice; |
| 2560 | |
| 2561 | i = startx + 2; |
| 2562 | j = starty + 3; |
| 2563 | |
| 2564 | for(choice = 0; choice < n_choices; ++choice) |
| 2565 | if(mouse_y == j + choice && mouse_x >= i && mouse_x <= i + strlen(choices[choice])) |
| 2566 | { if(choice == n_choices - 1) |
| 2567 | *p_choice = -1; |
| 2568 | else |
| 2569 | *p_choice = choice + 1; |
| 2570 | break; |
| 2571 | } |
| 2572 | }</span></font> |
| 2573 | </pre></td> |
| 2574 | </tr> |
| 2575 | </table> |
| 2576 | </div> |
| 2577 | </div> |
| 2578 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2579 | <hr> |
| 2580 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="MISCMOUSEFUNCS" id= |
| 2581 | "MISCMOUSEFUNCS">12.4. Miscellaneous Functions</a></h3> |
| 2582 | <p>The functions mouse_trafo() and wmouse_trafo() can be used to |
| 2583 | convert to mouse co-ordinates to screen relative co-ordinates. See |
| 2584 | curs_mouse(3X) man page for details.</p> |
| 2585 | <p>The mouseinterval function sets the maximum time (in thousands |
| 2586 | of a second) that can elapse between press and release events in |
| 2587 | order for them to be recognized as a click. This function returns |
| 2588 | the previous interval value. The default is one fifth of a |
| 2589 | second.</p> |
| 2590 | </div> |
| 2591 | </div> |
| 2592 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 2593 | <hr> |
| 2594 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="SCREEN" id="SCREEN">13. Screen |
| 2595 | Manipulation</a></h2> |
| 2596 | <p>In this section, we will look into some functions, which allow |
| 2597 | us to manage the screen efficiently and to write some fancy |
| 2598 | programs. This is especially important in writing games.</p> |
| 2599 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2600 | <hr> |
| 2601 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="GETYX" id="GETYX">13.1. getyx() |
| 2602 | functions</a></h3> |
| 2603 | <p>The function <var class="LITERAL">getyx()</var> can be used to |
| 2604 | find out the present cursor co-ordinates. It will fill the values |
| 2605 | of x and y co-ordinates in the arguments given to it. Since getyx() |
| 2606 | is a macro you don't have to pass the address of the variables. It |
| 2607 | can be called as</p> |
| 2608 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2609 | <tr> |
| 2610 | <td> |
| 2611 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2612 | <font color="#000000"> getyx(win, y, x); |
| 2613 | /* win: window pointer |
| 2614 | * y, x: y, x co-ordinates will be put into this variables |
| 2615 | */</font> |
| 2616 | </pre></td> |
| 2617 | </tr> |
| 2618 | </table> |
| 2619 | <p>The function getparyx() gets the beginning co-ordinates of the |
| 2620 | sub window relative to the main window. This is some times useful |
| 2621 | to update a sub window. When designing fancy stuff like writing |
| 2622 | multiple menus, it becomes difficult to store the menu positions, |
| 2623 | their first option co-ordinates etc. A simple solution to this |
| 2624 | problem, is to create menus in sub windows and later find the |
| 2625 | starting co-ordinates of the menus by using getparyx().</p> |
| 2626 | <p>The functions getbegyx() and getmaxyx() store current window's |
| 2627 | beginning and maximum co-ordinates. These functions are useful in |
| 2628 | the same way as above in managing the windows and sub windows |
| 2629 | effectively.</p> |
| 2630 | </div> |
| 2631 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2632 | <hr> |
| 2633 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="SCREENDUMP" id="SCREENDUMP">13.2. Screen |
| 2634 | Dumping</a></h3> |
| 2635 | <p>While writing games, some times it becomes necessary to store |
| 2636 | the state of the screen and restore it back to the same state. The |
| 2637 | function scr_dump() can be used to dump the screen contents to a |
| 2638 | file given as an argument. Later it can be restored by scr_restore |
| 2639 | function. These two simple functions can be used effectively to |
| 2640 | maintain a fast moving game with changing scenarios.</p> |
| 2641 | </div> |
| 2642 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2643 | <hr> |
| 2644 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="WINDOWDUMP" id="WINDOWDUMP">13.3. Window |
| 2645 | Dumping</a></h3> |
| 2646 | <p>To store and restore windows, the functions <var class= |
| 2647 | "LITERAL">putwin()</var> and <var class="LITERAL">getwin()</var> |
| 2648 | can be used. <var class="LITERAL">putwin()</var> puts the present |
| 2649 | window state into a file, which can be later restored by |
| 2650 | <var class="LITERAL">getwin()</var>.</p> |
| 2651 | <p>The function <var class="LITERAL">copywin()</var> can be used to |
| 2652 | copy a window completely onto another window. It takes the source |
| 2653 | and destination windows as parameters and according to the |
| 2654 | rectangle specified, it copies the rectangular region from source |
| 2655 | to destination window. It's last parameter specifies whether to |
| 2656 | overwrite or just overlay the contents on to the destination |
| 2657 | window. If this argument is true, then the copying is |
| 2658 | non-destructive.</p> |
| 2659 | </div> |
| 2660 | </div> |
| 2661 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 2662 | <hr> |
| 2663 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="MISC" id="MISC">14. Miscellaneous |
| 2664 | features</a></h2> |
| 2665 | <p>Now you know enough features to write a good curses program, |
| 2666 | with all bells and whistles. There are some miscellaneous functions |
| 2667 | which are useful in various cases. Let's go headlong into some of |
| 2668 | those.</p> |
| 2669 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2670 | <hr> |
| 2671 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="CURSSET" id="CURSSET">14.1. |
| 2672 | curs_set()</a></h3> |
| 2673 | <p>This function can be used to make the cursor invisible. The |
| 2674 | parameter to this function should be</p> |
| 2675 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2676 | <tr> |
| 2677 | <td> |
| 2678 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2679 | <font color="#000000"> 0 : invisible or |
| 2680 | 1 : normal or |
| 2681 | 2 : very visible.</font> |
| 2682 | </pre></td> |
| 2683 | </tr> |
| 2684 | </table> |
| 2685 | </div> |
| 2686 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2687 | <hr> |
| 2688 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="TEMPLEAVE" id="TEMPLEAVE">14.2. |
| 2689 | Temporarily Leaving Curses mode</a></h3> |
| 2690 | <p>Some times you may want to get back to cooked mode (normal line |
| 2691 | buffering mode) temporarily. In such a case you will first need to |
| 2692 | save the tty modes with a call to <var class= |
| 2693 | "LITERAL">def_prog_mode()</var> and then call <var class= |
| 2694 | "LITERAL">endwin()</var> to end the curses mode. This will leave |
| 2695 | you in the original tty mode. To get back to curses once you are |
| 2696 | done, call <var class="LITERAL">reset_prog_mode()</var> . This |
| 2697 | function returns the tty to the state stored by <var class= |
| 2698 | "LITERAL">def_prog_mode()</var>. Then do refresh(), and you are |
| 2699 | back to the curses mode. Here is an example showing the sequence of |
| 2700 | things to be done.</p> |
| 2701 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="BTELE" id="BTELE"></a> |
| 2702 | <p><b>Example 12. Temporarily Leaving Curses Mode</b></p> |
| 2703 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2704 | <tr> |
| 2705 | <td> |
| 2706 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2707 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 2708 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <ncurses.h> |
| 2709 | |
| 2710 | int main() |
| 2711 | { |
| 2712 | initscr(); /* Start curses mode */ |
| 2713 | printw("Hello World !!!\n"); /* Print Hello World */ |
| 2714 | refresh(); /* Print it on to the real screen */ |
| 2715 | def_prog_mode(); /* Save the tty modes */ |
| 2716 | endwin(); /* End curses mode temporarily */ |
| 2717 | system("/bin/sh"); /* Do whatever you like in cooked mode */ |
| 2718 | reset_prog_mode(); /* Return to the previous tty mode*/ |
| 2719 | /* stored by def_prog_mode() */ |
| 2720 | refresh(); /* Do refresh() to restore the */ |
| 2721 | /* Screen contents */ |
| 2722 | printw("Another String\n"); /* Back to curses use the full */ |
| 2723 | refresh(); /* capabilities of curses */ |
| 2724 | endwin(); /* End curses mode */ |
| 2725 | |
| 2726 | return 0; |
| 2727 | }</span></font> |
| 2728 | </pre></td> |
| 2729 | </tr> |
| 2730 | </table> |
| 2731 | </div> |
| 2732 | </div> |
| 2733 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2734 | <hr> |
| 2735 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="ACSVARS" id="ACSVARS">14.3. ACS_ |
| 2736 | variables</a></h3> |
| 2737 | <p>If you have ever programmed in DOS, you know about those nifty |
| 2738 | characters in extended character set. They are printable only on |
| 2739 | some terminals. NCURSES functions like <var class= |
| 2740 | "LITERAL">box()</var> use these characters. All these variables |
| 2741 | start with ACS meaning alternative character set. You might have |
| 2742 | noticed me using these characters in some of the programs above. |
| 2743 | Here's an example showing all the characters.</p> |
| 2744 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="BACSVARS" id="BACSVARS"></a> |
| 2745 | <p><b>Example 13. ACS Variables Example</b></p> |
| 2746 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2747 | <tr> |
| 2748 | <td> |
| 2749 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2750 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 2751 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <ncurses.h> |
| 2752 | |
| 2753 | int main() |
| 2754 | { |
| 2755 | initscr(); |
| 2756 | |
| 2757 | printw("Upper left corner "); addch(ACS_ULCORNER); printw("\n"); |
| 2758 | printw("Lower left corner "); addch(ACS_LLCORNER); printw("\n"); |
| 2759 | printw("Lower right corner "); addch(ACS_LRCORNER); printw("\n"); |
| 2760 | printw("Tee pointing right "); addch(ACS_LTEE); printw("\n"); |
| 2761 | printw("Tee pointing left "); addch(ACS_RTEE); printw("\n"); |
| 2762 | printw("Tee pointing up "); addch(ACS_BTEE); printw("\n"); |
| 2763 | printw("Tee pointing down "); addch(ACS_TTEE); printw("\n"); |
| 2764 | printw("Horizontal line "); addch(ACS_HLINE); printw("\n"); |
| 2765 | printw("Vertical line "); addch(ACS_VLINE); printw("\n"); |
| 2766 | printw("Large Plus or cross over "); addch(ACS_PLUS); printw("\n"); |
| 2767 | printw("Scan Line 1 "); addch(ACS_S1); printw("\n"); |
| 2768 | printw("Scan Line 3 "); addch(ACS_S3); printw("\n"); |
| 2769 | printw("Scan Line 7 "); addch(ACS_S7); printw("\n"); |
| 2770 | printw("Scan Line 9 "); addch(ACS_S9); printw("\n"); |
| 2771 | printw("Diamond "); addch(ACS_DIAMOND); printw("\n"); |
| 2772 | printw("Checker board (stipple) "); addch(ACS_CKBOARD); printw("\n"); |
| 2773 | printw("Degree Symbol "); addch(ACS_DEGREE); printw("\n"); |
| 2774 | printw("Plus/Minus Symbol "); addch(ACS_PLMINUS); printw("\n"); |
| 2775 | printw("Bullet "); addch(ACS_BULLET); printw("\n"); |
| 2776 | printw("Arrow Pointing Left "); addch(ACS_LARROW); printw("\n"); |
| 2777 | printw("Arrow Pointing Right "); addch(ACS_RARROW); printw("\n"); |
| 2778 | printw("Arrow Pointing Down "); addch(ACS_DARROW); printw("\n"); |
| 2779 | printw("Arrow Pointing Up "); addch(ACS_UARROW); printw("\n"); |
| 2780 | printw("Board of squares "); addch(ACS_BOARD); printw("\n"); |
| 2781 | printw("Lantern Symbol "); addch(ACS_LANTERN); printw("\n"); |
| 2782 | printw("Solid Square Block "); addch(ACS_BLOCK); printw("\n"); |
| 2783 | printw("Less/Equal sign "); addch(ACS_LEQUAL); printw("\n"); |
| 2784 | printw("Greater/Equal sign "); addch(ACS_GEQUAL); printw("\n"); |
| 2785 | printw("Pi "); addch(ACS_PI); printw("\n"); |
| 2786 | printw("Not equal "); addch(ACS_NEQUAL); printw("\n"); |
| 2787 | printw("UK pound sign "); addch(ACS_STERLING); printw("\n"); |
| 2788 | |
| 2789 | refresh(); |
| 2790 | getch(); |
| 2791 | endwin(); |
| 2792 | |
| 2793 | return 0; |
| 2794 | }</span></font> |
| 2795 | </pre></td> |
| 2796 | </tr> |
| 2797 | </table> |
| 2798 | </div> |
| 2799 | </div> |
| 2800 | </div> |
| 2801 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 2802 | <hr> |
| 2803 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="OTHERLIB" id="OTHERLIB">15. Other |
| 2804 | libraries</a></h2> |
| 2805 | <p>Apart from the curses library, there are few text mode |
| 2806 | libraries, which provide more functionality and a lot of features. |
| 2807 | The following sections explain three standard libraries which are |
| 2808 | usually distributed along with curses.</p> |
| 2809 | </div> |
| 2810 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 2811 | <hr> |
| 2812 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="PANELS" id="PANELS">16. Panel |
| 2813 | Library</a></h2> |
| 2814 | <p>Now that you are proficient in curses, you wanted to do some |
| 2815 | thing big. You created a lot of overlapping windows to give a |
| 2816 | professional windows-type look. Unfortunately, it soon becomes |
| 2817 | difficult to manage these. The multiple refreshes, updates plunge |
| 2818 | you into a nightmare. The overlapping windows create blotches, |
| 2819 | whenever you forget to refresh the windows in the proper order.</p> |
| 2820 | <p>Don't despair. There's an elegant solution provided in panels |
| 2821 | library. In the words of developers of ncurses</p> |
| 2822 | <p><em>When your interface design is such that windows may dive |
| 2823 | deeper into the visibility stack or pop to the top at runtime, the |
| 2824 | resulting book-keeping can be tedious and difficult to get right. |
| 2825 | Hence the panels library.</em></p> |
| 2826 | <p>If you have lot of overlapping windows, then panels library is |
| 2827 | the way to go. It obviates the need of doing series of |
| 2828 | wnoutrefresh(), doupdate() and relieves the burden of doing it |
| 2829 | correctly(bottom up). The library maintains information about the |
| 2830 | order of windows, their overlapping and update the screen properly. |
| 2831 | So why wait? Let's take a close peek into panels.</p> |
| 2832 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2833 | <hr> |
| 2834 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="PANELBASICS" id="PANELBASICS">16.1. The |
| 2835 | Basics</a></h3> |
| 2836 | <p>Panel object is a window that is implicitly treated as part of a |
| 2837 | deck including all other panel objects. The deck is treated as a |
| 2838 | stack with the top panel being completely visible and the other |
| 2839 | panels may or may not be obscured according to their positions. So |
| 2840 | the basic idea is to create a stack of overlapping panels and use |
| 2841 | panels library to display them correctly. There is a function |
| 2842 | similar to refresh() which, when called , displays panels in the |
| 2843 | correct order. Functions are provided to hide or show panels, move |
| 2844 | panels, change its size etc.. The overlapping problem is managed by |
| 2845 | the panels library during all the calls to these functions.</p> |
| 2846 | <p>The general flow of a panel program goes like this:</p> |
| 2847 | <ol type="1"> |
| 2848 | <li> |
| 2849 | <p>Create the windows (with newwin()) to be attached to the |
| 2850 | panels.</p> |
| 2851 | </li> |
| 2852 | <li> |
| 2853 | <p>Create panels with the chosen visibility order. Stack them up |
| 2854 | according to the desired visibility. The function new_panel() is |
| 2855 | used to created panels.</p> |
| 2856 | </li> |
| 2857 | <li> |
| 2858 | <p>Call update_panels() to write the panels to the virtual screen |
| 2859 | in correct visibility order. Do a doupdate() to show it on the |
| 2860 | screen.</p> |
| 2861 | </li> |
| 2862 | <li> |
| 2863 | <p>Mainpulate the panels with show_panel(), hide_panel(), |
| 2864 | move_panel() etc. Make use of helper functions like panel_hidden() |
| 2865 | and panel_window(). Make use of user pointer to store custom data |
| 2866 | for a panel. Use the functions set_panel_userptr() and |
| 2867 | panel_userptr() to set and get the user pointer for a panel.</p> |
| 2868 | </li> |
| 2869 | <li> |
| 2870 | <p>When you are done with the panel use del_panel() to delete the |
| 2871 | panel.</p> |
| 2872 | </li> |
| 2873 | </ol> |
| 2874 | <p>Let's make the concepts clear, with some programs. The following |
| 2875 | is a simple program which creates 3 overlapping panels and shows |
| 2876 | them on the screen.</p> |
| 2877 | </div> |
| 2878 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2879 | <hr> |
| 2880 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="COMPILEPANELS" id="COMPILEPANELS">16.2. |
| 2881 | Compiling With the Panels Library</a></h3> |
| 2882 | <p>To use panels library functions, you have to include panel.h and |
| 2883 | to link the program with panels library the flag -lpanel should be |
| 2884 | added along with -lncurses in that order.</p> |
| 2885 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2886 | <tr> |
| 2887 | <td> |
| 2888 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2889 | <font color="#000000"> #include <panel.h> |
| 2890 | . |
| 2891 | . |
| 2892 | . |
| 2893 | |
| 2894 | compile and link: gcc <program file> -lpanel -lncurses</font> |
| 2895 | </pre></td> |
| 2896 | </tr> |
| 2897 | </table> |
| 2898 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="PPASI" id="PPASI"></a> |
| 2899 | <p><b>Example 14. Panel basics</b></p> |
| 2900 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2901 | <tr> |
| 2902 | <td> |
| 2903 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2904 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 2905 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <panel.h> |
| 2906 | |
| 2907 | int main() |
| 2908 | { WINDOW *my_wins[3]; |
| 2909 | PANEL *my_panels[3]; |
| 2910 | int lines = 10, cols = 40, y = 2, x = 4, i; |
| 2911 | |
| 2912 | initscr(); |
| 2913 | cbreak(); |
| 2914 | noecho(); |
| 2915 | |
| 2916 | /* Create windows for the panels */ |
| 2917 | my_wins[0] = newwin(lines, cols, y, x); |
| 2918 | my_wins[1] = newwin(lines, cols, y + 1, x + 5); |
| 2919 | my_wins[2] = newwin(lines, cols, y + 2, x + 10); |
| 2920 | |
| 2921 | /* |
| 2922 | * Create borders around the windows so that you can see the effect |
| 2923 | * of panels |
| 2924 | */ |
| 2925 | for(i = 0; i < 3; ++i) |
| 2926 | box(my_wins[i], 0, 0); |
| 2927 | |
| 2928 | /* Attach a panel to each window */ /* Order is bottom up */ |
| 2929 | my_panels[0] = new_panel(my_wins[0]); /* Push 0, order: stdscr-0 */ |
| 2930 | my_panels[1] = new_panel(my_wins[1]); /* Push 1, order: stdscr-0-1 */ |
| 2931 | my_panels[2] = new_panel(my_wins[2]); /* Push 2, order: stdscr-0-1-2 */ |
| 2932 | |
| 2933 | /* Update the stacking order. 2nd panel will be on top */ |
| 2934 | update_panels(); |
| 2935 | |
| 2936 | /* Show it on the screen */ |
| 2937 | doupdate(); |
| 2938 | |
| 2939 | getch(); |
| 2940 | endwin(); |
| 2941 | } |
| 2942 | </span></font> |
| 2943 | </pre></td> |
| 2944 | </tr> |
| 2945 | </table> |
| 2946 | </div> |
| 2947 | <p>As you can see, above program follows a simple flow as |
| 2948 | explained. The windows are created with newwin() and then they are |
| 2949 | attached to panels with new_panel(). As we attach one panel after |
| 2950 | another, the stack of panels gets updated. To put them on screen |
| 2951 | update_panels() and doupdate() are called.</p> |
| 2952 | </div> |
| 2953 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 2954 | <hr> |
| 2955 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="PANELBROWSING" id="PANELBROWSING">16.3. |
| 2956 | Panel Window Browsing</a></h3> |
| 2957 | <p>A slightly complicated example is given below. This program |
| 2958 | creates 3 windows which can be cycled through using tab. Have a |
| 2959 | look at the code.</p> |
| 2960 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="PPABR" id="PPABR"></a> |
| 2961 | <p><b>Example 15. Panel Window Browsing Example</b></p> |
| 2962 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 2963 | <tr> |
| 2964 | <td> |
| 2965 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 2966 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 2967 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <panel.h> |
| 2968 | |
| 2969 | #define NLINES 10 |
| 2970 | #define NCOLS 40 |
| 2971 | |
| 2972 | void init_wins(WINDOW **wins, int n); |
| 2973 | void win_show(WINDOW *win, char *label, int label_color); |
| 2974 | void print_in_middle(WINDOW *win, int starty, int startx, int width, char *string, chtype color); |
| 2975 | |
| 2976 | int main() |
| 2977 | { WINDOW *my_wins[3]; |
| 2978 | PANEL *my_panels[3]; |
| 2979 | PANEL *top; |
| 2980 | int ch; |
| 2981 | |
| 2982 | /* Initialize curses */ |
| 2983 | initscr(); |
| 2984 | start_color(); |
| 2985 | cbreak(); |
| 2986 | noecho(); |
| 2987 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); |
| 2988 | |
| 2989 | /* Initialize all the colors */ |
| 2990 | init_pair(1, COLOR_RED, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 2991 | init_pair(2, COLOR_GREEN, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 2992 | init_pair(3, COLOR_BLUE, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 2993 | init_pair(4, COLOR_CYAN, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 2994 | |
| 2995 | init_wins(my_wins, 3); |
| 2996 | |
| 2997 | /* Attach a panel to each window */ /* Order is bottom up */ |
| 2998 | my_panels[0] = new_panel(my_wins[0]); /* Push 0, order: stdscr-0 */ |
| 2999 | my_panels[1] = new_panel(my_wins[1]); /* Push 1, order: stdscr-0-1 */ |
| 3000 | my_panels[2] = new_panel(my_wins[2]); /* Push 2, order: stdscr-0-1-2 */ |
| 3001 | |
| 3002 | /* Set up the user pointers to the next panel */ |
| 3003 | set_panel_userptr(my_panels[0], my_panels[1]); |
| 3004 | set_panel_userptr(my_panels[1], my_panels[2]); |
| 3005 | set_panel_userptr(my_panels[2], my_panels[0]); |
| 3006 | |
| 3007 | /* Update the stacking order. 2nd panel will be on top */ |
| 3008 | update_panels(); |
| 3009 | |
| 3010 | /* Show it on the screen */ |
| 3011 | attron(COLOR_PAIR(4)); |
| 3012 | mvprintw(LINES - 2, 0, "Use tab to browse through the windows (F1 to Exit)"); |
| 3013 | attroff(COLOR_PAIR(4)); |
| 3014 | doupdate(); |
| 3015 | |
| 3016 | top = my_panels[2]; |
| 3017 | while((ch = getch()) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 3018 | { switch(ch) |
| 3019 | { case 9: |
| 3020 | top = (PANEL *)panel_userptr(top); |
| 3021 | top_panel(top); |
| 3022 | break; |
| 3023 | } |
| 3024 | update_panels(); |
| 3025 | doupdate(); |
| 3026 | } |
| 3027 | endwin(); |
| 3028 | return 0; |
| 3029 | } |
| 3030 | |
| 3031 | /* Put all the windows */ |
| 3032 | void init_wins(WINDOW **wins, int n) |
| 3033 | { int x, y, i; |
| 3034 | char label[80]; |
| 3035 | |
| 3036 | y = 2; |
| 3037 | x = 10; |
| 3038 | for(i = 0; i < n; ++i) |
| 3039 | { wins[i] = newwin(NLINES, NCOLS, y, x); |
| 3040 | sprintf(label, "Window Number %d", i + 1); |
| 3041 | win_show(wins[i], label, i + 1); |
| 3042 | y += 3; |
| 3043 | x += 7; |
| 3044 | } |
| 3045 | } |
| 3046 | |
| 3047 | /* Show the window with a border and a label */ |
| 3048 | void win_show(WINDOW *win, char *label, int label_color) |
| 3049 | { int startx, starty, height, width; |
| 3050 | |
| 3051 | getbegyx(win, starty, startx); |
| 3052 | getmaxyx(win, height, width); |
| 3053 | |
| 3054 | box(win, 0, 0); |
| 3055 | mvwaddch(win, 2, 0, ACS_LTEE); |
| 3056 | mvwhline(win, 2, 1, ACS_HLINE, width - 2); |
| 3057 | mvwaddch(win, 2, width - 1, ACS_RTEE); |
| 3058 | |
| 3059 | print_in_middle(win, 1, 0, width, label, COLOR_PAIR(label_color)); |
| 3060 | } |
| 3061 | |
| 3062 | void print_in_middle(WINDOW *win, int starty, int startx, int width, char *string, chtype color) |
| 3063 | { int length, x, y; |
| 3064 | float temp; |
| 3065 | |
| 3066 | if(win == NULL) |
| 3067 | win = stdscr; |
| 3068 | getyx(win, y, x); |
| 3069 | if(startx != 0) |
| 3070 | x = startx; |
| 3071 | if(starty != 0) |
| 3072 | y = starty; |
| 3073 | if(width == 0) |
| 3074 | width = 80; |
| 3075 | |
| 3076 | length = strlen(string); |
| 3077 | temp = (width - length)/ 2; |
| 3078 | x = startx + (int)temp; |
| 3079 | wattron(win, color); |
| 3080 | mvwprintw(win, y, x, "%s", string); |
| 3081 | wattroff(win, color); |
| 3082 | refresh(); |
| 3083 | }</span></font> |
| 3084 | </pre></td> |
| 3085 | </tr> |
| 3086 | </table> |
| 3087 | </div> |
| 3088 | </div> |
| 3089 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 3090 | <hr> |
| 3091 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="USERPTRUSING" id="USERPTRUSING">16.4. |
| 3092 | Using User Pointers</a></h3> |
| 3093 | <p>In the above example I used user pointers to find out the next |
| 3094 | window in the cycle. We can attach custom information to the panel |
| 3095 | by specifying a user pointer, which can point to any information |
| 3096 | you want to store. In this case I stored the pointer to the next |
| 3097 | panel in the cycle. User pointer for a panel can be set with the |
| 3098 | function <var class="LITERAL">set_panel_userptr()</var>. It can be |
| 3099 | accessed using the function <var class= |
| 3100 | "LITERAL">panel_userptr()</var> which will return the user pointer |
| 3101 | for the panel given as argument. After finding the next panel in |
| 3102 | the cycle It's brought to the top by the function top_panel(). This |
| 3103 | function brings the panel given as argument to the top of the panel |
| 3104 | stack.</p> |
| 3105 | </div> |
| 3106 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 3107 | <hr> |
| 3108 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="PANELMOVERESIZE" id= |
| 3109 | "PANELMOVERESIZE">16.5. Moving and Resizing Panels</a></h3> |
| 3110 | <p>The function <var class="LITERAL">move_panel()</var> can be used |
| 3111 | to move a panel to the desired location. It does not change the |
| 3112 | position of the panel in the stack. Make sure that you use |
| 3113 | move_panel() instead mvwin() on the window associated with the |
| 3114 | panel.</p> |
| 3115 | <p>Resizing a panel is slightly complex. There is no straight |
| 3116 | forward function just to resize the window associated with a panel. |
| 3117 | A solution to resize a panel is to create a new window with the |
| 3118 | desired sizes, change the window associated with the panel using |
| 3119 | replace_panel(). Don't forget to delete the old window. The window |
| 3120 | associated with a panel can be found by using the function |
| 3121 | panel_window().</p> |
| 3122 | <p>The following program shows these concepts, in supposedly simple |
| 3123 | program. You can cycle through the window with <TAB> as |
| 3124 | usual. To resize or move the active panel press 'r' for resize 'm' |
| 3125 | for moving. Then use arrow keys to resize or move it to the desired |
| 3126 | way and press enter to end your resizing or moving. This example |
| 3127 | makes use of user data to get the required data to do the |
| 3128 | operations.</p> |
| 3129 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="PPARE" id="PPARE"></a> |
| 3130 | <p><b>Example 16. Panel Moving and Resizing example</b></p> |
| 3131 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 3132 | <tr> |
| 3133 | <td> |
| 3134 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 3135 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 3136 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <panel.h> |
| 3137 | |
| 3138 | typedef struct _PANEL_DATA { |
| 3139 | int x, y, w, h; |
| 3140 | char label[80]; |
| 3141 | int label_color; |
| 3142 | PANEL *next; |
| 3143 | }PANEL_DATA; |
| 3144 | |
| 3145 | #define NLINES 10 |
| 3146 | #define NCOLS 40 |
| 3147 | |
| 3148 | void init_wins(WINDOW **wins, int n); |
| 3149 | void win_show(WINDOW *win, char *label, int label_color); |
| 3150 | void print_in_middle(WINDOW *win, int starty, int startx, int width, char *string, chtype color); |
| 3151 | void set_user_ptrs(PANEL **panels, int n); |
| 3152 | |
| 3153 | int main() |
| 3154 | { WINDOW *my_wins[3]; |
| 3155 | PANEL *my_panels[3]; |
| 3156 | PANEL_DATA *top; |
| 3157 | PANEL *stack_top; |
| 3158 | WINDOW *temp_win, *old_win; |
| 3159 | int ch; |
| 3160 | int newx, newy, neww, newh; |
| 3161 | int size = FALSE, move = FALSE; |
| 3162 | |
| 3163 | /* Initialize curses */ |
| 3164 | initscr(); |
| 3165 | start_color(); |
| 3166 | cbreak(); |
| 3167 | noecho(); |
| 3168 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); |
| 3169 | |
| 3170 | /* Initialize all the colors */ |
| 3171 | init_pair(1, COLOR_RED, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 3172 | init_pair(2, COLOR_GREEN, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 3173 | init_pair(3, COLOR_BLUE, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 3174 | init_pair(4, COLOR_CYAN, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 3175 | |
| 3176 | init_wins(my_wins, 3); |
| 3177 | |
| 3178 | /* Attach a panel to each window */ /* Order is bottom up */ |
| 3179 | my_panels[0] = new_panel(my_wins[0]); /* Push 0, order: stdscr-0 */ |
| 3180 | my_panels[1] = new_panel(my_wins[1]); /* Push 1, order: stdscr-0-1 */ |
| 3181 | my_panels[2] = new_panel(my_wins[2]); /* Push 2, order: stdscr-0-1-2 */ |
| 3182 | |
| 3183 | set_user_ptrs(my_panels, 3); |
| 3184 | /* Update the stacking order. 2nd panel will be on top */ |
| 3185 | update_panels(); |
| 3186 | |
| 3187 | /* Show it on the screen */ |
| 3188 | attron(COLOR_PAIR(4)); |
| 3189 | mvprintw(LINES - 3, 0, "Use 'm' for moving, 'r' for resizing"); |
| 3190 | mvprintw(LINES - 2, 0, "Use tab to browse through the windows (F1 to Exit)"); |
| 3191 | attroff(COLOR_PAIR(4)); |
| 3192 | doupdate(); |
| 3193 | |
| 3194 | stack_top = my_panels[2]; |
| 3195 | top = (PANEL_DATA *)panel_userptr(stack_top); |
| 3196 | newx = top->x; |
| 3197 | newy = top->y; |
| 3198 | neww = top->w; |
| 3199 | newh = top->h; |
| 3200 | while((ch = getch()) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 3201 | { switch(ch) |
| 3202 | { case 9: /* Tab */ |
| 3203 | top = (PANEL_DATA *)panel_userptr(stack_top); |
| 3204 | top_panel(top->next); |
| 3205 | stack_top = top->next; |
| 3206 | top = (PANEL_DATA *)panel_userptr(stack_top); |
| 3207 | newx = top->x; |
| 3208 | newy = top->y; |
| 3209 | neww = top->w; |
| 3210 | newh = top->h; |
| 3211 | break; |
| 3212 | case 'r': /* Re-Size*/ |
| 3213 | size = TRUE; |
| 3214 | attron(COLOR_PAIR(4)); |
| 3215 | mvprintw(LINES - 4, 0, "Entered Resizing :Use Arrow Keys to resize and press <ENTER> to end resizing"); |
| 3216 | refresh(); |
| 3217 | attroff(COLOR_PAIR(4)); |
| 3218 | break; |
| 3219 | case 'm': /* Move */ |
| 3220 | attron(COLOR_PAIR(4)); |
| 3221 | mvprintw(LINES - 4, 0, "Entered Moving: Use Arrow Keys to Move and press <ENTER> to end moving"); |
| 3222 | refresh(); |
| 3223 | attroff(COLOR_PAIR(4)); |
| 3224 | move = TRUE; |
| 3225 | break; |
| 3226 | case KEY_LEFT: |
| 3227 | if(size == TRUE) |
| 3228 | { --newx; |
| 3229 | ++neww; |
| 3230 | } |
| 3231 | if(move == TRUE) |
| 3232 | --newx; |
| 3233 | break; |
| 3234 | case KEY_RIGHT: |
| 3235 | if(size == TRUE) |
| 3236 | { ++newx; |
| 3237 | --neww; |
| 3238 | } |
| 3239 | if(move == TRUE) |
| 3240 | ++newx; |
| 3241 | break; |
| 3242 | case KEY_UP: |
| 3243 | if(size == TRUE) |
| 3244 | { --newy; |
| 3245 | ++newh; |
| 3246 | } |
| 3247 | if(move == TRUE) |
| 3248 | --newy; |
| 3249 | break; |
| 3250 | case KEY_DOWN: |
| 3251 | if(size == TRUE) |
| 3252 | { ++newy; |
| 3253 | --newh; |
| 3254 | } |
| 3255 | if(move == TRUE) |
| 3256 | ++newy; |
| 3257 | break; |
| 3258 | case 10: /* Enter */ |
| 3259 | move(LINES - 4, 0); |
| 3260 | clrtoeol(); |
| 3261 | refresh(); |
| 3262 | if(size == TRUE) |
| 3263 | { old_win = panel_window(stack_top); |
| 3264 | temp_win = newwin(newh, neww, newy, newx); |
| 3265 | replace_panel(stack_top, temp_win); |
| 3266 | win_show(temp_win, top->label, top->label_color); |
| 3267 | delwin(old_win); |
| 3268 | size = FALSE; |
| 3269 | } |
| 3270 | if(move == TRUE) |
| 3271 | { move_panel(stack_top, newy, newx); |
| 3272 | move = FALSE; |
| 3273 | } |
| 3274 | break; |
| 3275 | |
| 3276 | } |
| 3277 | attron(COLOR_PAIR(4)); |
| 3278 | mvprintw(LINES - 3, 0, "Use 'm' for moving, 'r' for resizing"); |
| 3279 | mvprintw(LINES - 2, 0, "Use tab to browse through the windows (F1 to Exit)"); |
| 3280 | attroff(COLOR_PAIR(4)); |
| 3281 | refresh(); |
| 3282 | update_panels(); |
| 3283 | doupdate(); |
| 3284 | } |
| 3285 | endwin(); |
| 3286 | return 0; |
| 3287 | } |
| 3288 | |
| 3289 | /* Put all the windows */ |
| 3290 | void init_wins(WINDOW **wins, int n) |
| 3291 | { int x, y, i; |
| 3292 | char label[80]; |
| 3293 | |
| 3294 | y = 2; |
| 3295 | x = 10; |
| 3296 | for(i = 0; i < n; ++i) |
| 3297 | { wins[i] = newwin(NLINES, NCOLS, y, x); |
| 3298 | sprintf(label, "Window Number %d", i + 1); |
| 3299 | win_show(wins[i], label, i + 1); |
| 3300 | y += 3; |
| 3301 | x += 7; |
| 3302 | } |
| 3303 | } |
| 3304 | |
| 3305 | /* Set the PANEL_DATA structures for individual panels */ |
| 3306 | void set_user_ptrs(PANEL **panels, int n) |
| 3307 | { PANEL_DATA *ptrs; |
| 3308 | WINDOW *win; |
| 3309 | int x, y, w, h, i; |
| 3310 | char temp[80]; |
| 3311 | |
| 3312 | ptrs = (PANEL_DATA *)calloc(n, sizeof(PANEL_DATA)); |
| 3313 | |
| 3314 | for(i = 0;i < n; ++i) |
| 3315 | { win = panel_window(panels[i]); |
| 3316 | getbegyx(win, y, x); |
| 3317 | getmaxyx(win, h, w); |
| 3318 | ptrs[i].x = x; |
| 3319 | ptrs[i].y = y; |
| 3320 | ptrs[i].w = w; |
| 3321 | ptrs[i].h = h; |
| 3322 | sprintf(temp, "Window Number %d", i + 1); |
| 3323 | strcpy(ptrs[i].label, temp); |
| 3324 | ptrs[i].label_color = i + 1; |
| 3325 | if(i + 1 == n) |
| 3326 | ptrs[i].next = panels[0]; |
| 3327 | else |
| 3328 | ptrs[i].next = panels[i + 1]; |
| 3329 | set_panel_userptr(panels[i], &ptrs[i]); |
| 3330 | } |
| 3331 | } |
| 3332 | |
| 3333 | /* Show the window with a border and a label */ |
| 3334 | void win_show(WINDOW *win, char *label, int label_color) |
| 3335 | { int startx, starty, height, width; |
| 3336 | |
| 3337 | getbegyx(win, starty, startx); |
| 3338 | getmaxyx(win, height, width); |
| 3339 | |
| 3340 | box(win, 0, 0); |
| 3341 | mvwaddch(win, 2, 0, ACS_LTEE); |
| 3342 | mvwhline(win, 2, 1, ACS_HLINE, width - 2); |
| 3343 | mvwaddch(win, 2, width - 1, ACS_RTEE); |
| 3344 | |
| 3345 | print_in_middle(win, 1, 0, width, label, COLOR_PAIR(label_color)); |
| 3346 | } |
| 3347 | |
| 3348 | void print_in_middle(WINDOW *win, int starty, int startx, int width, char *string, chtype color) |
| 3349 | { int length, x, y; |
| 3350 | float temp; |
| 3351 | |
| 3352 | if(win == NULL) |
| 3353 | win = stdscr; |
| 3354 | getyx(win, y, x); |
| 3355 | if(startx != 0) |
| 3356 | x = startx; |
| 3357 | if(starty != 0) |
| 3358 | y = starty; |
| 3359 | if(width == 0) |
| 3360 | width = 80; |
| 3361 | |
| 3362 | length = strlen(string); |
| 3363 | temp = (width - length)/ 2; |
| 3364 | x = startx + (int)temp; |
| 3365 | wattron(win, color); |
| 3366 | mvwprintw(win, y, x, "%s", string); |
| 3367 | wattroff(win, color); |
| 3368 | refresh(); |
| 3369 | }</span></font> |
| 3370 | </pre></td> |
| 3371 | </tr> |
| 3372 | </table> |
| 3373 | </div> |
| 3374 | <p>Concentrate on the main while loop. Once it finds out the type |
| 3375 | of key pressed, it takes appropriate action. If 'r' is pressed |
| 3376 | resizing mode is started. After this the new sizes are updated as |
| 3377 | the user presses the arrow keys. When the user presses |
| 3378 | <ENTER> present selection ends and panel is resized by using |
| 3379 | the concept explained. While in resizing mode the program doesn't |
| 3380 | show how the window is getting resized. It's left as an exercise to |
| 3381 | the reader to print a dotted border while it gets resized to a new |
| 3382 | position.</p> |
| 3383 | <p>When the user presses 'm' the move mode starts. This is a bit |
| 3384 | simpler than resizing. As the arrow keys are pressed the new |
| 3385 | position is updated and pressing of <ENTER> causes the panel |
| 3386 | to be moved by calling the function move_panel().</p> |
| 3387 | <p>In this program the user data which is represented as |
| 3388 | PANEL_DATA, plays very important role in finding the associated |
| 3389 | information with a panel. As written in the comments, the |
| 3390 | PANEL_DATA stores the panel sizes, label, label color and a pointer |
| 3391 | to the next panel in the cycle.</p> |
| 3392 | </div> |
| 3393 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 3394 | <hr> |
| 3395 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="PANELSHOWHIDE" id="PANELSHOWHIDE">16.6. |
| 3396 | Hiding and Showing Panels</a></h3> |
| 3397 | <p>A Panel can be hidden by using the function hide_panel(). This |
| 3398 | function merely removes it form the stack of panels, thus hiding it |
| 3399 | on the screen once you do update_panels() and doupdate(). It |
| 3400 | doesn't destroy the PANEL structure associated with the hidden |
| 3401 | panel. It can be shown again by using the show_panel() |
| 3402 | function.</p> |
| 3403 | <p>The following program shows the hiding of panels. Press 'a' or |
| 3404 | 'b' or 'c' to show or hide first, second and third windows |
| 3405 | respectively. It uses a user data with a small variable hide, which |
| 3406 | keeps track of whether the window is hidden or not. For some reason |
| 3407 | the function <var class="LITERAL">panel_hidden()</var> which tells |
| 3408 | whether a panel is hidden or not is not working. A bug report was |
| 3409 | also presented by Michael Andres <a href= |
| 3410 | "http://www.geocrawler.com/archives/3/344/1999/9/0/2643549/" |
| 3411 | target="_top">here</a></p> |
| 3412 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="PPAHI" id="PPAHI"></a> |
| 3413 | <p><b>Example 17. Panel Hiding and Showing example</b></p> |
| 3414 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 3415 | <tr> |
| 3416 | <td> |
| 3417 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 3418 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 3419 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <panel.h> |
| 3420 | |
| 3421 | typedef struct _PANEL_DATA { |
| 3422 | int hide; /* TRUE if panel is hidden */ |
| 3423 | }PANEL_DATA; |
| 3424 | |
| 3425 | #define NLINES 10 |
| 3426 | #define NCOLS 40 |
| 3427 | |
| 3428 | void init_wins(WINDOW **wins, int n); |
| 3429 | void win_show(WINDOW *win, char *label, int label_color); |
| 3430 | void print_in_middle(WINDOW *win, int starty, int startx, int width, char *string, chtype color); |
| 3431 | |
| 3432 | int main() |
| 3433 | { WINDOW *my_wins[3]; |
| 3434 | PANEL *my_panels[3]; |
| 3435 | PANEL_DATA panel_datas[3]; |
| 3436 | PANEL_DATA *temp; |
| 3437 | int ch; |
| 3438 | |
| 3439 | /* Initialize curses */ |
| 3440 | initscr(); |
| 3441 | start_color(); |
| 3442 | cbreak(); |
| 3443 | noecho(); |
| 3444 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); |
| 3445 | |
| 3446 | /* Initialize all the colors */ |
| 3447 | init_pair(1, COLOR_RED, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 3448 | init_pair(2, COLOR_GREEN, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 3449 | init_pair(3, COLOR_BLUE, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 3450 | init_pair(4, COLOR_CYAN, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 3451 | |
| 3452 | init_wins(my_wins, 3); |
| 3453 | |
| 3454 | /* Attach a panel to each window */ /* Order is bottom up */ |
| 3455 | my_panels[0] = new_panel(my_wins[0]); /* Push 0, order: stdscr-0 */ |
| 3456 | my_panels[1] = new_panel(my_wins[1]); /* Push 1, order: stdscr-0-1 */ |
| 3457 | my_panels[2] = new_panel(my_wins[2]); /* Push 2, order: stdscr-0-1-2 */ |
| 3458 | |
| 3459 | /* Initialize panel datas saying that nothing is hidden */ |
| 3460 | panel_datas[0].hide = FALSE; |
| 3461 | panel_datas[1].hide = FALSE; |
| 3462 | panel_datas[2].hide = FALSE; |
| 3463 | |
| 3464 | set_panel_userptr(my_panels[0], &panel_datas[0]); |
| 3465 | set_panel_userptr(my_panels[1], &panel_datas[1]); |
| 3466 | set_panel_userptr(my_panels[2], &panel_datas[2]); |
| 3467 | |
| 3468 | /* Update the stacking order. 2nd panel will be on top */ |
| 3469 | update_panels(); |
| 3470 | |
| 3471 | /* Show it on the screen */ |
| 3472 | attron(COLOR_PAIR(4)); |
| 3473 | mvprintw(LINES - 3, 0, "Show or Hide a window with 'a'(first window) 'b'(Second Window) 'c'(Third Window)"); |
| 3474 | mvprintw(LINES - 2, 0, "F1 to Exit"); |
| 3475 | |
| 3476 | attroff(COLOR_PAIR(4)); |
| 3477 | doupdate(); |
| 3478 | |
| 3479 | while((ch = getch()) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 3480 | { switch(ch) |
| 3481 | { case 'a': |
| 3482 | temp = (PANEL_DATA *)panel_userptr(my_panels[0]); |
| 3483 | if(temp->hide == FALSE) |
| 3484 | { hide_panel(my_panels[0]); |
| 3485 | temp->hide = TRUE; |
| 3486 | } |
| 3487 | else |
| 3488 | { show_panel(my_panels[0]); |
| 3489 | temp->hide = FALSE; |
| 3490 | } |
| 3491 | break; |
| 3492 | case 'b': |
| 3493 | temp = (PANEL_DATA *)panel_userptr(my_panels[1]); |
| 3494 | if(temp->hide == FALSE) |
| 3495 | { hide_panel(my_panels[1]); |
| 3496 | temp->hide = TRUE; |
| 3497 | } |
| 3498 | else |
| 3499 | { show_panel(my_panels[1]); |
| 3500 | temp->hide = FALSE; |
| 3501 | } |
| 3502 | break; |
| 3503 | case 'c': |
| 3504 | temp = (PANEL_DATA *)panel_userptr(my_panels[2]); |
| 3505 | if(temp->hide == FALSE) |
| 3506 | { hide_panel(my_panels[2]); |
| 3507 | temp->hide = TRUE; |
| 3508 | } |
| 3509 | else |
| 3510 | { show_panel(my_panels[2]); |
| 3511 | temp->hide = FALSE; |
| 3512 | } |
| 3513 | break; |
| 3514 | } |
| 3515 | update_panels(); |
| 3516 | doupdate(); |
| 3517 | } |
| 3518 | endwin(); |
| 3519 | return 0; |
| 3520 | } |
| 3521 | |
| 3522 | /* Put all the windows */ |
| 3523 | void init_wins(WINDOW **wins, int n) |
| 3524 | { int x, y, i; |
| 3525 | char label[80]; |
| 3526 | |
| 3527 | y = 2; |
| 3528 | x = 10; |
| 3529 | for(i = 0; i < n; ++i) |
| 3530 | { wins[i] = newwin(NLINES, NCOLS, y, x); |
| 3531 | sprintf(label, "Window Number %d", i + 1); |
| 3532 | win_show(wins[i], label, i + 1); |
| 3533 | y += 3; |
| 3534 | x += 7; |
| 3535 | } |
| 3536 | } |
| 3537 | |
| 3538 | /* Show the window with a border and a label */ |
| 3539 | void win_show(WINDOW *win, char *label, int label_color) |
| 3540 | { int startx, starty, height, width; |
| 3541 | |
| 3542 | getbegyx(win, starty, startx); |
| 3543 | getmaxyx(win, height, width); |
| 3544 | |
| 3545 | box(win, 0, 0); |
| 3546 | mvwaddch(win, 2, 0, ACS_LTEE); |
| 3547 | mvwhline(win, 2, 1, ACS_HLINE, width - 2); |
| 3548 | mvwaddch(win, 2, width - 1, ACS_RTEE); |
| 3549 | |
| 3550 | print_in_middle(win, 1, 0, width, label, COLOR_PAIR(label_color)); |
| 3551 | } |
| 3552 | |
| 3553 | void print_in_middle(WINDOW *win, int starty, int startx, int width, char *string, chtype color) |
| 3554 | { int length, x, y; |
| 3555 | float temp; |
| 3556 | |
| 3557 | if(win == NULL) |
| 3558 | win = stdscr; |
| 3559 | getyx(win, y, x); |
| 3560 | if(startx != 0) |
| 3561 | x = startx; |
| 3562 | if(starty != 0) |
| 3563 | y = starty; |
| 3564 | if(width == 0) |
| 3565 | width = 80; |
| 3566 | |
| 3567 | length = strlen(string); |
| 3568 | temp = (width - length)/ 2; |
| 3569 | x = startx + (int)temp; |
| 3570 | wattron(win, color); |
| 3571 | mvwprintw(win, y, x, "%s", string); |
| 3572 | wattroff(win, color); |
| 3573 | refresh(); |
| 3574 | }</span></font> |
| 3575 | </pre></td> |
| 3576 | </tr> |
| 3577 | </table> |
| 3578 | </div> |
| 3579 | </div> |
| 3580 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 3581 | <hr> |
| 3582 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="PANELABOVE" id="PANELABOVE">16.7. |
| 3583 | panel_above() and panel_below() Functions</a></h3> |
| 3584 | <p>The functions <var class="LITERAL">panel_above()</var> and |
| 3585 | <var class="LITERAL">panel_below()</var> can be used to find out |
| 3586 | the panel above and below a panel. If the argument to these |
| 3587 | functions is NULL, then they return a pointer to bottom panel and |
| 3588 | top panel respectively.</p> |
| 3589 | </div> |
| 3590 | </div> |
| 3591 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 3592 | <hr> |
| 3593 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="MENUS" id="MENUS">17. Menus |
| 3594 | Library</a></h2> |
| 3595 | <p>The menus library provides a nice extension to basic curses, |
| 3596 | through which you can create menus. It provides a set of functions |
| 3597 | to create menus. But they have to be customized to give a nicer |
| 3598 | look, with colors etc. Let's get into the details.</p> |
| 3599 | <p>A menu is a screen display that assists the user to choose some |
| 3600 | subset of a given set of items. To put it simple, a menu is a |
| 3601 | collection of items from which one or more items can be chosen. |
| 3602 | Some readers might not be aware of multiple item selection |
| 3603 | capability. Menu library provides functionality to write menus from |
| 3604 | which the user can chose more than one item as the preferred |
| 3605 | choice. This is dealt with in a later section. Now it is time for |
| 3606 | some rudiments.</p> |
| 3607 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 3608 | <hr> |
| 3609 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="MENUBASICS" id="MENUBASICS">17.1. The |
| 3610 | Basics</a></h3> |
| 3611 | <p>To create menus, you first create items, and then post the menu |
| 3612 | to the display. After that, all the processing of user responses is |
| 3613 | done in an elegant function menu_driver() which is the work horse |
| 3614 | of any menu program.</p> |
| 3615 | <p>The general flow of control of a menu program looks like |
| 3616 | this.</p> |
| 3617 | <ol type="1"> |
| 3618 | <li> |
| 3619 | <p>Initialize curses</p> |
| 3620 | </li> |
| 3621 | <li> |
| 3622 | <p>Create items using new_item(). You can specify a name and |
| 3623 | description for the items.</p> |
| 3624 | </li> |
| 3625 | <li> |
| 3626 | <p>Create the menu with new_menu() by specifying the items to be |
| 3627 | attached with.</p> |
| 3628 | </li> |
| 3629 | <li> |
| 3630 | <p>Post the menu with menu_post() and refresh the screen.</p> |
| 3631 | </li> |
| 3632 | <li> |
| 3633 | <p>Process the user requests with a loop and do necessary updates |
| 3634 | to menu with menu_driver.</p> |
| 3635 | </li> |
| 3636 | <li> |
| 3637 | <p>Unpost the menu with menu_unpost()</p> |
| 3638 | </li> |
| 3639 | <li> |
| 3640 | <p>Free the memory allocated to menu by free_menu()</p> |
| 3641 | </li> |
| 3642 | <li> |
| 3643 | <p>Free the memory allocated to the items with free_item()</p> |
| 3644 | </li> |
| 3645 | <li> |
| 3646 | <p>End curses</p> |
| 3647 | </li> |
| 3648 | </ol> |
| 3649 | <p>Let's see a program which prints a simple menu and updates the |
| 3650 | current selection with up, down arrows.</p> |
| 3651 | </div> |
| 3652 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 3653 | <hr> |
| 3654 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="COMPILEMENUS" id="COMPILEMENUS">17.2. |
| 3655 | Compiling With the Menu Library</a></h3> |
| 3656 | <p>To use menu library functions, you have to include menu.h and to |
| 3657 | link the program with menu library the flag -lmenu should be added |
| 3658 | along with -lncurses in that order.</p> |
| 3659 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 3660 | <tr> |
| 3661 | <td> |
| 3662 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 3663 | <font color="#000000"> #include <menu.h> |
| 3664 | . |
| 3665 | . |
| 3666 | . |
| 3667 | |
| 3668 | compile and link: gcc <program file> -lmenu -lncurses</font> |
| 3669 | </pre></td> |
| 3670 | </tr> |
| 3671 | </table> |
| 3672 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="MMESI" id="MMESI"></a> |
| 3673 | <p><b>Example 18. Menu Basics</b></p> |
| 3674 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 3675 | <tr> |
| 3676 | <td> |
| 3677 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 3678 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 3679 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <curses.h> |
| 3680 | #include <menu.h> |
| 3681 | |
| 3682 | #define ARRAY_SIZE(a) (sizeof(a) / sizeof(a[0])) |
| 3683 | #define CTRLD 4 |
| 3684 | |
| 3685 | char *choices[] = { |
| 3686 | "Choice 1", |
| 3687 | "Choice 2", |
| 3688 | "Choice 3", |
| 3689 | "Choice 4", |
| 3690 | "Exit", |
| 3691 | }; |
| 3692 | |
| 3693 | int main() |
| 3694 | { ITEM **my_items; |
| 3695 | int c; |
| 3696 | MENU *my_menu; |
| 3697 | int n_choices, i; |
| 3698 | ITEM *cur_item; |
| 3699 | |
| 3700 | |
| 3701 | initscr(); |
| 3702 | cbreak(); |
| 3703 | noecho(); |
| 3704 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); |
| 3705 | |
| 3706 | n_choices = ARRAY_SIZE(choices); |
| 3707 | my_items = (ITEM **)calloc(n_choices + 1, sizeof(ITEM *)); |
| 3708 | |
| 3709 | for(i = 0; i < n_choices; ++i) |
| 3710 | my_items[i] = new_item(choices[i], choices[i]); |
| 3711 | my_items[n_choices] = (ITEM *)NULL; |
| 3712 | |
| 3713 | my_menu = new_menu((ITEM **)my_items); |
| 3714 | mvprintw(LINES - 2, 0, "F1 to Exit"); |
| 3715 | post_menu(my_menu); |
| 3716 | refresh(); |
| 3717 | |
| 3718 | while((c = getch()) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 3719 | { switch(c) |
| 3720 | { case KEY_DOWN: |
| 3721 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_DOWN_ITEM); |
| 3722 | break; |
| 3723 | case KEY_UP: |
| 3724 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_UP_ITEM); |
| 3725 | break; |
| 3726 | } |
| 3727 | } |
| 3728 | |
| 3729 | free_item(my_items[0]); |
| 3730 | free_item(my_items[1]); |
| 3731 | free_menu(my_menu); |
| 3732 | endwin(); |
| 3733 | } |
| 3734 | </span></font> |
| 3735 | </pre></td> |
| 3736 | </tr> |
| 3737 | </table> |
| 3738 | </div> |
| 3739 | <p>This program demonstrates the basic concepts involved in |
| 3740 | creating a menu using menus library. First we create the items |
| 3741 | using new_item() and then attach them to the menu with new_menu() |
| 3742 | function. After posting the menu and refreshing the screen, the |
| 3743 | main processing loop starts. It reads user input and takes |
| 3744 | corresponding action. The function menu_driver() is the main work |
| 3745 | horse of the menu system. The second parameter to this function |
| 3746 | tells what's to be done with the menu. According to the parameter, |
| 3747 | menu_driver() does the corresponding task. The value can be either |
| 3748 | a menu navigational request, an ascii character, or a KEY_MOUSE |
| 3749 | special key associated with a mouse event.</p> |
| 3750 | <p>The menu_driver accepts following navigational requests.</p> |
| 3751 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 3752 | <tr> |
| 3753 | <td> |
| 3754 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 3755 | <font color= |
| 3756 | "#000000"> REQ_LEFT_ITEM Move left to an item. |
| 3757 | REQ_RIGHT_ITEM Move right to an item. |
| 3758 | REQ_UP_ITEM Move up to an item. |
| 3759 | REQ_DOWN_ITEM Move down to an item. |
| 3760 | REQ_SCR_ULINE Scroll up a line. |
| 3761 | REQ_SCR_DLINE Scroll down a line. |
| 3762 | REQ_SCR_DPAGE Scroll down a page. |
| 3763 | REQ_SCR_UPAGE Scroll up a page. |
| 3764 | REQ_FIRST_ITEM Move to the first item. |
| 3765 | REQ_LAST_ITEM Move to the last item. |
| 3766 | REQ_NEXT_ITEM Move to the next item. |
| 3767 | REQ_PREV_ITEM Move to the previous item. |
| 3768 | REQ_TOGGLE_ITEM Select/deselect an item. |
| 3769 | REQ_CLEAR_PATTERN Clear the menu pattern buffer. |
| 3770 | REQ_BACK_PATTERN Delete the previous character from the pattern buffer. |
| 3771 | REQ_NEXT_MATCH Move to the next item matching the pattern match. |
| 3772 | REQ_PREV_MATCH Move to the previous item matching the pattern match. </font> |
| 3773 | </pre></td> |
| 3774 | </tr> |
| 3775 | </table> |
| 3776 | <p>Don't get overwhelmed by the number of options. We will see them |
| 3777 | slowly one after another. The options of interest in this example |
| 3778 | are REQ_UP_ITEM and REQ_DOWN_ITEM. These two options when passed to |
| 3779 | menu_driver, menu driver updates the current item to one item up or |
| 3780 | down respectively.</p> |
| 3781 | </div> |
| 3782 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 3783 | <hr> |
| 3784 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="MENUDRIVER" id="MENUDRIVER">17.3. Menu |
| 3785 | Driver: The work horse of the menu system</a></h3> |
| 3786 | <p>As you have seen in the above example, menu_driver plays an |
| 3787 | important role in updating the menu. It is very important to |
| 3788 | understand various options it takes and what they do. As explained |
| 3789 | above, the second parameter to menu_driver() can be either a |
| 3790 | navigational request, a printable character or a KEY_MOUSE key. |
| 3791 | Let's dissect the different navigational requests.</p> |
| 3792 | <ul> |
| 3793 | <li> |
| 3794 | <p><em>REQ_LEFT_ITEM and REQ_RIGHT_ITEM</em></p> |
| 3795 | <p>A Menu can be displayed with multiple columns for more than one |
| 3796 | item. This can be done by using the <var class= |
| 3797 | "LITERAL">menu_format()</var>function. When a multi columnar menu |
| 3798 | is displayed these requests cause the menu driver to move the |
| 3799 | current selection to left or right.</p> |
| 3800 | </li> |
| 3801 | <li> |
| 3802 | <p><em>REQ_UP_ITEM and REQ_DOWN_ITEM</em></p> |
| 3803 | <p>These two options you have seen in the above example. These |
| 3804 | options when given, makes the menu_driver to move the current |
| 3805 | selection to an item up or down.</p> |
| 3806 | </li> |
| 3807 | <li> |
| 3808 | <p><em>REQ_SCR_* options</em></p> |
| 3809 | <p>The four options REQ_SCR_ULINE, REQ_SCR_DLINE, REQ_SCR_DPAGE, |
| 3810 | REQ_SCR_UPAGE are related to scrolling. If all the items in the |
| 3811 | menu cannot be displayed in the menu sub window, then the menu is |
| 3812 | scrollable. These requests can be given to the menu_driver to do |
| 3813 | the scrolling either one line up, down or one page down or up |
| 3814 | respectively.</p> |
| 3815 | </li> |
| 3816 | <li> |
| 3817 | <p><em>REQ_FIRST_ITEM, REQ_LAST_ITEM, REQ_NEXT_ITEM and |
| 3818 | REQ_PREV_ITEM</em></p> |
| 3819 | <p>These requests are self explanatory.</p> |
| 3820 | </li> |
| 3821 | <li> |
| 3822 | <p><em>REQ_TOGGLE_ITEM</em></p> |
| 3823 | <p>This request when given, toggles the present selection. This |
| 3824 | option is to be used only in a multi valued menu. So to use this |
| 3825 | request the option O_ONEVALUE must be off. This option can be made |
| 3826 | off or on with set_menu_opts().</p> |
| 3827 | </li> |
| 3828 | <li> |
| 3829 | <p><em>Pattern Requests</em></p> |
| 3830 | <p>Every menu has an associated pattern buffer, which is used to |
| 3831 | find the nearest match to the ascii characters entered by the user. |
| 3832 | Whenever ascii characters are given to menu_driver, it puts in to |
| 3833 | the pattern buffer. It also tries to find the nearest match to the |
| 3834 | pattern in the items list and moves current selection to that item. |
| 3835 | The request REQ_CLEAR_PATTERN clears the pattern buffer. The |
| 3836 | request REQ_BACK_PATTERN deletes the previous character in the |
| 3837 | pattern buffer. In case the pattern matches more than one item then |
| 3838 | the matched items can be cycled through REQ_NEXT_MATCH and |
| 3839 | REQ_PREV_MATCH which move the current selection to the next and |
| 3840 | previous matches respectively.</p> |
| 3841 | </li> |
| 3842 | <li> |
| 3843 | <p><em>Mouse Requests</em></p> |
| 3844 | <p>In case of KEY_MOUSE requests, according to the mouse position |
| 3845 | an action is taken accordingly. The action to be taken is explained |
| 3846 | in the man page as,</p> |
| 3847 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="90%"> |
| 3848 | <tr> |
| 3849 | <td> |
| 3850 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 3851 | <font color= |
| 3852 | "#000000"><em> If the second argument is the KEY_MOUSE special key, the |
| 3853 | associated mouse event is translated into one of the above |
| 3854 | pre-defined requests. Currently only clicks in the user |
| 3855 | window (e.g. inside the menu display area or the decora­ |
| 3856 | tion window) are handled. If you click above the display |
| 3857 | region of the menu, a REQ_SCR_ULINE is generated, if you |
| 3858 | doubleclick a REQ_SCR_UPAGE is generated and if you |
| 3859 | tripleclick a REQ_FIRST_ITEM is generated. If you click |
| 3860 | below the display region of the menu, a REQ_SCR_DLINE is |
| 3861 | generated, if you doubleclick a REQ_SCR_DPAGE is generated |
| 3862 | and if you tripleclick a REQ_LAST_ITEM is generated. If |
| 3863 | you click at an item inside the display area of the menu, |
| 3864 | the menu cursor is positioned to that item.</em></font> |
| 3865 | </pre></td> |
| 3866 | </tr> |
| 3867 | </table> |
| 3868 | </li> |
| 3869 | </ul> |
| 3870 | <p>Each of the above requests will be explained in the following |
| 3871 | lines with several examples whenever appropriate.</p> |
| 3872 | </div> |
| 3873 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 3874 | <hr> |
| 3875 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="MENUWINDOWS" id="MENUWINDOWS">17.4. Menu |
| 3876 | Windows</a></h3> |
| 3877 | <p>Every menu created is associated with a window and a sub window. |
| 3878 | The menu window displays any title or border associated with the |
| 3879 | menu. The menu sub window displays the menu items currently |
| 3880 | available for selection. But we didn't specify any window or sub |
| 3881 | window in the simple example. When a window is not specified, |
| 3882 | stdscr is taken as the main window, and then menu system calculates |
| 3883 | the sub window size required for the display of items. Then items |
| 3884 | are displayed in the calculated sub window. So let's play with |
| 3885 | these windows and display a menu with a border and a title.</p> |
| 3886 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="MMEWI" id="MMEWI"></a> |
| 3887 | <p><b>Example 19. Menu Windows Usage example</b></p> |
| 3888 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 3889 | <tr> |
| 3890 | <td> |
| 3891 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 3892 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 3893 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <menu.h> |
| 3894 | |
| 3895 | #define ARRAY_SIZE(a) (sizeof(a) / sizeof(a[0])) |
| 3896 | #define CTRLD 4 |
| 3897 | |
| 3898 | char *choices[] = { |
| 3899 | "Choice 1", |
| 3900 | "Choice 2", |
| 3901 | "Choice 3", |
| 3902 | "Choice 4", |
| 3903 | "Exit", |
| 3904 | (char *)NULL, |
| 3905 | }; |
| 3906 | void print_in_middle(WINDOW *win, int starty, int startx, int width, char *string, chtype color); |
| 3907 | |
| 3908 | int main() |
| 3909 | { ITEM **my_items; |
| 3910 | int c; |
| 3911 | MENU *my_menu; |
| 3912 | WINDOW *my_menu_win; |
| 3913 | int n_choices, i; |
| 3914 | |
| 3915 | /* Initialize curses */ |
| 3916 | initscr(); |
| 3917 | start_color(); |
| 3918 | cbreak(); |
| 3919 | noecho(); |
| 3920 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); |
| 3921 | init_pair(1, COLOR_RED, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 3922 | |
| 3923 | /* Create items */ |
| 3924 | n_choices = ARRAY_SIZE(choices); |
| 3925 | my_items = (ITEM **)calloc(n_choices, sizeof(ITEM *)); |
| 3926 | for(i = 0; i < n_choices; ++i) |
| 3927 | my_items[i] = new_item(choices[i], choices[i]); |
| 3928 | |
| 3929 | /* Crate menu */ |
| 3930 | my_menu = new_menu((ITEM **)my_items); |
| 3931 | |
| 3932 | /* Create the window to be associated with the menu */ |
| 3933 | my_menu_win = newwin(10, 40, 4, 4); |
| 3934 | keypad(my_menu_win, TRUE); |
| 3935 | |
| 3936 | /* Set main window and sub window */ |
| 3937 | set_menu_win(my_menu, my_menu_win); |
| 3938 | set_menu_sub(my_menu, derwin(my_menu_win, 6, 38, 3, 1)); |
| 3939 | |
| 3940 | /* Set menu mark to the string " * " */ |
| 3941 | set_menu_mark(my_menu, " * "); |
| 3942 | |
| 3943 | /* Print a border around the main window and print a title */ |
| 3944 | box(my_menu_win, 0, 0); |
| 3945 | print_in_middle(my_menu_win, 1, 0, 40, "My Menu", COLOR_PAIR(1)); |
| 3946 | mvwaddch(my_menu_win, 2, 0, ACS_LTEE); |
| 3947 | mvwhline(my_menu_win, 2, 1, ACS_HLINE, 38); |
| 3948 | mvwaddch(my_menu_win, 2, 39, ACS_RTEE); |
| 3949 | mvprintw(LINES - 2, 0, "F1 to exit"); |
| 3950 | refresh(); |
| 3951 | |
| 3952 | /* Post the menu */ |
| 3953 | post_menu(my_menu); |
| 3954 | wrefresh(my_menu_win); |
| 3955 | |
| 3956 | while((c = wgetch(my_menu_win)) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 3957 | { switch(c) |
| 3958 | { case KEY_DOWN: |
| 3959 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_DOWN_ITEM); |
| 3960 | break; |
| 3961 | case KEY_UP: |
| 3962 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_UP_ITEM); |
| 3963 | break; |
| 3964 | } |
| 3965 | wrefresh(my_menu_win); |
| 3966 | } |
| 3967 | |
| 3968 | /* Unpost and free all the memory taken up */ |
| 3969 | unpost_menu(my_menu); |
| 3970 | free_menu(my_menu); |
| 3971 | for(i = 0; i < n_choices; ++i) |
| 3972 | free_item(my_items[i]); |
| 3973 | endwin(); |
| 3974 | } |
| 3975 | |
| 3976 | void print_in_middle(WINDOW *win, int starty, int startx, int width, char *string, chtype color) |
| 3977 | { int length, x, y; |
| 3978 | float temp; |
| 3979 | |
| 3980 | if(win == NULL) |
| 3981 | win = stdscr; |
| 3982 | getyx(win, y, x); |
| 3983 | if(startx != 0) |
| 3984 | x = startx; |
| 3985 | if(starty != 0) |
| 3986 | y = starty; |
| 3987 | if(width == 0) |
| 3988 | width = 80; |
| 3989 | |
| 3990 | length = strlen(string); |
| 3991 | temp = (width - length)/ 2; |
| 3992 | x = startx + (int)temp; |
| 3993 | wattron(win, color); |
| 3994 | mvwprintw(win, y, x, "%s", string); |
| 3995 | wattroff(win, color); |
| 3996 | refresh(); |
| 3997 | }</span></font> |
| 3998 | </pre></td> |
| 3999 | </tr> |
| 4000 | </table> |
| 4001 | </div> |
| 4002 | <p>This example creates a menu with a title, border, a fancy line |
| 4003 | separating title and the items. As you can see, in order to attach |
| 4004 | a window to a menu the function set_menu_win() has to be used. Then |
| 4005 | we attach the sub window also. This displays the items in the sub |
| 4006 | window. You can also set the mark string which gets displayed to |
| 4007 | the left of the selected item with set_menu_mark().</p> |
| 4008 | </div> |
| 4009 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 4010 | <hr> |
| 4011 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="SCROLLMENUS" id="SCROLLMENUS">17.5. |
| 4012 | Scrolling Menus</a></h3> |
| 4013 | <p>If the sub window given for a window is not big enough to show |
| 4014 | all the items, then the menu will be scrollable. When you are on |
| 4015 | the last item in the present list, if you send REQ_DOWN_ITEM, it |
| 4016 | gets translated into REQ_SCR_DLINE and the menu scrolls by one |
| 4017 | item. You can manually give REQ_SCR_ operations to do scrolling. |
| 4018 | Let's see how it can be done.</p> |
| 4019 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="MMESC" id="MMESC"></a> |
| 4020 | <p><b>Example 20. Scrolling Menus example</b></p> |
| 4021 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 4022 | <tr> |
| 4023 | <td> |
| 4024 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 4025 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 4026 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <curses.h> |
| 4027 | #include <menu.h> |
| 4028 | |
| 4029 | #define ARRAY_SIZE(a) (sizeof(a) / sizeof(a[0])) |
| 4030 | #define CTRLD 4 |
| 4031 | |
| 4032 | char *choices[] = { |
| 4033 | "Choice 1", |
| 4034 | "Choice 2", |
| 4035 | "Choice 3", |
| 4036 | "Choice 4", |
| 4037 | "Choice 5", |
| 4038 | "Choice 6", |
| 4039 | "Choice 7", |
| 4040 | "Choice 8", |
| 4041 | "Choice 9", |
| 4042 | "Choice 10", |
| 4043 | "Exit", |
| 4044 | (char *)NULL, |
| 4045 | }; |
| 4046 | void print_in_middle(WINDOW *win, int starty, int startx, int width, char *string, chtype color); |
| 4047 | |
| 4048 | int main() |
| 4049 | { ITEM **my_items; |
| 4050 | int c; |
| 4051 | MENU *my_menu; |
| 4052 | WINDOW *my_menu_win; |
| 4053 | int n_choices, i; |
| 4054 | |
| 4055 | /* Initialize curses */ |
| 4056 | initscr(); |
| 4057 | start_color(); |
| 4058 | cbreak(); |
| 4059 | noecho(); |
| 4060 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); |
| 4061 | init_pair(1, COLOR_RED, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 4062 | init_pair(2, COLOR_CYAN, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 4063 | |
| 4064 | /* Create items */ |
| 4065 | n_choices = ARRAY_SIZE(choices); |
| 4066 | my_items = (ITEM **)calloc(n_choices, sizeof(ITEM *)); |
| 4067 | for(i = 0; i < n_choices; ++i) |
| 4068 | my_items[i] = new_item(choices[i], choices[i]); |
| 4069 | |
| 4070 | /* Crate menu */ |
| 4071 | my_menu = new_menu((ITEM **)my_items); |
| 4072 | |
| 4073 | /* Create the window to be associated with the menu */ |
| 4074 | my_menu_win = newwin(10, 40, 4, 4); |
| 4075 | keypad(my_menu_win, TRUE); |
| 4076 | |
| 4077 | /* Set main window and sub window */ |
| 4078 | set_menu_win(my_menu, my_menu_win); |
| 4079 | set_menu_sub(my_menu, derwin(my_menu_win, 6, 38, 3, 1)); |
| 4080 | set_menu_format(my_menu, 5, 1); |
| 4081 | |
| 4082 | /* Set menu mark to the string " * " */ |
| 4083 | set_menu_mark(my_menu, " * "); |
| 4084 | |
| 4085 | /* Print a border around the main window and print a title */ |
| 4086 | box(my_menu_win, 0, 0); |
| 4087 | print_in_middle(my_menu_win, 1, 0, 40, "My Menu", COLOR_PAIR(1)); |
| 4088 | mvwaddch(my_menu_win, 2, 0, ACS_LTEE); |
| 4089 | mvwhline(my_menu_win, 2, 1, ACS_HLINE, 38); |
| 4090 | mvwaddch(my_menu_win, 2, 39, ACS_RTEE); |
| 4091 | |
| 4092 | /* Post the menu */ |
| 4093 | post_menu(my_menu); |
| 4094 | wrefresh(my_menu_win); |
| 4095 | |
| 4096 | attron(COLOR_PAIR(2)); |
| 4097 | mvprintw(LINES - 2, 0, "Use PageUp and PageDown to scoll down or up a page of items"); |
| 4098 | mvprintw(LINES - 1, 0, "Arrow Keys to navigate (F1 to Exit)"); |
| 4099 | attroff(COLOR_PAIR(2)); |
| 4100 | refresh(); |
| 4101 | |
| 4102 | while((c = wgetch(my_menu_win)) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 4103 | { switch(c) |
| 4104 | { case KEY_DOWN: |
| 4105 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_DOWN_ITEM); |
| 4106 | break; |
| 4107 | case KEY_UP: |
| 4108 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_UP_ITEM); |
| 4109 | break; |
| 4110 | case KEY_NPAGE: |
| 4111 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_SCR_DPAGE); |
| 4112 | break; |
| 4113 | case KEY_PPAGE: |
| 4114 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_SCR_UPAGE); |
| 4115 | break; |
| 4116 | } |
| 4117 | wrefresh(my_menu_win); |
| 4118 | } |
| 4119 | |
| 4120 | /* Unpost and free all the memory taken up */ |
| 4121 | unpost_menu(my_menu); |
| 4122 | free_menu(my_menu); |
| 4123 | for(i = 0; i < n_choices; ++i) |
| 4124 | free_item(my_items[i]); |
| 4125 | endwin(); |
| 4126 | } |
| 4127 | |
| 4128 | void print_in_middle(WINDOW *win, int starty, int startx, int width, char *string, chtype color) |
| 4129 | { int length, x, y; |
| 4130 | float temp; |
| 4131 | |
| 4132 | if(win == NULL) |
| 4133 | win = stdscr; |
| 4134 | getyx(win, y, x); |
| 4135 | if(startx != 0) |
| 4136 | x = startx; |
| 4137 | if(starty != 0) |
| 4138 | y = starty; |
| 4139 | if(width == 0) |
| 4140 | width = 80; |
| 4141 | |
| 4142 | length = strlen(string); |
| 4143 | temp = (width - length)/ 2; |
| 4144 | x = startx + (int)temp; |
| 4145 | wattron(win, color); |
| 4146 | mvwprintw(win, y, x, "%s", string); |
| 4147 | wattroff(win, color); |
| 4148 | refresh(); |
| 4149 | }</span></font> |
| 4150 | </pre></td> |
| 4151 | </tr> |
| 4152 | </table> |
| 4153 | </div> |
| 4154 | <p>This program is self-explanatory. In this example the number of |
| 4155 | choices has been increased to ten, which is larger than our sub |
| 4156 | window size which can hold 6 items. This message has to be |
| 4157 | explicitly conveyed to the menu system with the function |
| 4158 | set_menu_format(). In here we specify the number of rows and |
| 4159 | columns we want to be displayed for a single page. We can specify |
| 4160 | any number of items to be shown, in the rows variables, if it is |
| 4161 | less than the height of the sub window. If the key pressed by the |
| 4162 | user is a PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN, the menu is scrolled a page due to |
| 4163 | the requests (REQ_SCR_DPAGE and REQ_SCR_UPAGE) given to |
| 4164 | menu_driver().</p> |
| 4165 | </div> |
| 4166 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 4167 | <hr> |
| 4168 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="MULTICOLUMN" id="MULTICOLUMN">17.6. |
| 4169 | Multi Columnar Menus</a></h3> |
| 4170 | <p>In the above example you have seen how to use the function |
| 4171 | set_menu_format(). I didn't mention what the cols variable (third |
| 4172 | parameter) does. Well, If your sub window is wide enough, you can |
| 4173 | opt to display more than one item per row. This can be specified in |
| 4174 | the cols variable. To make things simpler, the following example |
| 4175 | doesn't show descriptions for the items.</p> |
| 4176 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="MMEMUCO" id="MMEMUCO"></a> |
| 4177 | <p><b>Example 21. Milt Columnar Menus Example</b></p> |
| 4178 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 4179 | <tr> |
| 4180 | <td> |
| 4181 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 4182 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 4183 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <curses.h> |
| 4184 | #include <menu.h> |
| 4185 | |
| 4186 | #define ARRAY_SIZE(a) (sizeof(a) / sizeof(a[0])) |
| 4187 | #define CTRLD 4 |
| 4188 | |
| 4189 | char *choices[] = { |
| 4190 | "Choice 1", "Choice 2", "Choice 3", "Choice 4", "Choice 5", |
| 4191 | "Choice 6", "Choice 7", "Choice 8", "Choice 9", "Choice 10", |
| 4192 | "Choice 11", "Choice 12", "Choice 13", "Choice 14", "Choice 15", |
| 4193 | "Choice 16", "Choice 17", "Choice 18", "Choice 19", "Choice 20", |
| 4194 | "Exit", |
| 4195 | (char *)NULL, |
| 4196 | }; |
| 4197 | |
| 4198 | int main() |
| 4199 | { ITEM **my_items; |
| 4200 | int c; |
| 4201 | MENU *my_menu; |
| 4202 | WINDOW *my_menu_win; |
| 4203 | int n_choices, i; |
| 4204 | |
| 4205 | /* Initialize curses */ |
| 4206 | initscr(); |
| 4207 | start_color(); |
| 4208 | cbreak(); |
| 4209 | noecho(); |
| 4210 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); |
| 4211 | init_pair(1, COLOR_RED, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 4212 | init_pair(2, COLOR_CYAN, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 4213 | |
| 4214 | /* Create items */ |
| 4215 | n_choices = ARRAY_SIZE(choices); |
| 4216 | my_items = (ITEM **)calloc(n_choices, sizeof(ITEM *)); |
| 4217 | for(i = 0; i < n_choices; ++i) |
| 4218 | my_items[i] = new_item(choices[i], choices[i]); |
| 4219 | |
| 4220 | /* Crate menu */ |
| 4221 | my_menu = new_menu((ITEM **)my_items); |
| 4222 | |
| 4223 | /* Set menu option not to show the description */ |
| 4224 | menu_opts_off(my_menu, O_SHOWDESC); |
| 4225 | |
| 4226 | /* Create the window to be associated with the menu */ |
| 4227 | my_menu_win = newwin(10, 70, 4, 4); |
| 4228 | keypad(my_menu_win, TRUE); |
| 4229 | |
| 4230 | /* Set main window and sub window */ |
| 4231 | set_menu_win(my_menu, my_menu_win); |
| 4232 | set_menu_sub(my_menu, derwin(my_menu_win, 6, 68, 3, 1)); |
| 4233 | set_menu_format(my_menu, 5, 3); |
| 4234 | set_menu_mark(my_menu, " * "); |
| 4235 | |
| 4236 | /* Print a border around the main window and print a title */ |
| 4237 | box(my_menu_win, 0, 0); |
| 4238 | |
| 4239 | attron(COLOR_PAIR(2)); |
| 4240 | mvprintw(LINES - 3, 0, "Use PageUp and PageDown to scroll"); |
| 4241 | mvprintw(LINES - 2, 0, "Use Arrow Keys to navigate (F1 to Exit)"); |
| 4242 | attroff(COLOR_PAIR(2)); |
| 4243 | refresh(); |
| 4244 | |
| 4245 | /* Post the menu */ |
| 4246 | post_menu(my_menu); |
| 4247 | wrefresh(my_menu_win); |
| 4248 | |
| 4249 | while((c = wgetch(my_menu_win)) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 4250 | { switch(c) |
| 4251 | { case KEY_DOWN: |
| 4252 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_DOWN_ITEM); |
| 4253 | break; |
| 4254 | case KEY_UP: |
| 4255 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_UP_ITEM); |
| 4256 | break; |
| 4257 | case KEY_LEFT: |
| 4258 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_LEFT_ITEM); |
| 4259 | break; |
| 4260 | case KEY_RIGHT: |
| 4261 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_RIGHT_ITEM); |
| 4262 | break; |
| 4263 | case KEY_NPAGE: |
| 4264 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_SCR_DPAGE); |
| 4265 | break; |
| 4266 | case KEY_PPAGE: |
| 4267 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_SCR_UPAGE); |
| 4268 | break; |
| 4269 | } |
| 4270 | wrefresh(my_menu_win); |
| 4271 | } |
| 4272 | |
| 4273 | /* Unpost and free all the memory taken up */ |
| 4274 | unpost_menu(my_menu); |
| 4275 | free_menu(my_menu); |
| 4276 | for(i = 0; i < n_choices; ++i) |
| 4277 | free_item(my_items[i]); |
| 4278 | endwin(); |
| 4279 | }</span></font> |
| 4280 | </pre></td> |
| 4281 | </tr> |
| 4282 | </table> |
| 4283 | </div> |
| 4284 | <p>Watch the function call to set_menu_format(). It specifies the |
| 4285 | number of columns to be 3, thus displaying 3 items per row. We have |
| 4286 | also switched off the showing descriptions with the function |
| 4287 | menu_opts_off(). There are couple of functions set_menu_opts(), |
| 4288 | menu_opts_on() and menu_opts() which can be used to manipulate menu |
| 4289 | options. The following menu options can be specified.</p> |
| 4290 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 4291 | <tr> |
| 4292 | <td> |
| 4293 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 4294 | <font color="#000000"> O_ONEVALUE |
| 4295 | Only one item can be selected for this menu. |
| 4296 | |
| 4297 | O_SHOWDESC |
| 4298 | Display the item descriptions when the menu is |
| 4299 | posted. |
| 4300 | |
| 4301 | O_ROWMAJOR |
| 4302 | Display the menu in row-major order. |
| 4303 | |
| 4304 | O_IGNORECASE |
| 4305 | Ignore the case when pattern-matching. |
| 4306 | |
| 4307 | O_SHOWMATCH |
| 4308 | Move the cursor to within the item name while pat­ |
| 4309 | tern-matching. |
| 4310 | |
| 4311 | O_NONCYCLIC |
| 4312 | Don't wrap around next-item and previous-item, |
| 4313 | requests to the other end of the menu.</font> |
| 4314 | </pre></td> |
| 4315 | </tr> |
| 4316 | </table> |
| 4317 | <p>All options are on by default. You can switch specific |
| 4318 | attributes on or off with menu_opts_on() and menu_opts_off() |
| 4319 | functions. You can also use set_menu_opts() to directly specify the |
| 4320 | options. The argument to this function should be a OR ed value of |
| 4321 | some of those above constants. The function menu_opts() can be used |
| 4322 | to find out a menu's present options.</p> |
| 4323 | </div> |
| 4324 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 4325 | <hr> |
| 4326 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="MULTIVALUEMENUS" id= |
| 4327 | "MULTIVALUEMENUS">17.7. Multi Valued Menus</a></h3> |
| 4328 | <p>You might be wondering what if you switch off the option |
| 4329 | O_ONEVALUE. Then the menu becomes multi-valued. That means you can |
| 4330 | select more than one item. This brings us to the request |
| 4331 | REQ_TOGGLE_ITEM. Let's see it in action.</p> |
| 4332 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="MMETO" id="MMETO"></a> |
| 4333 | <p><b>Example 22. Multi Valued Menus example</b></p> |
| 4334 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 4335 | <tr> |
| 4336 | <td> |
| 4337 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 4338 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 4339 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <curses.h> |
| 4340 | #include <menu.h> |
| 4341 | |
| 4342 | #define ARRAY_SIZE(a) (sizeof(a) / sizeof(a[0])) |
| 4343 | #define CTRLD 4 |
| 4344 | |
| 4345 | char *choices[] = { |
| 4346 | "Choice 1", |
| 4347 | "Choice 2", |
| 4348 | "Choice 3", |
| 4349 | "Choice 4", |
| 4350 | "Choice 5", |
| 4351 | "Choice 6", |
| 4352 | "Choice 7", |
| 4353 | "Exit", |
| 4354 | }; |
| 4355 | |
| 4356 | int main() |
| 4357 | { ITEM **my_items; |
| 4358 | int c; |
| 4359 | MENU *my_menu; |
| 4360 | int n_choices, i; |
| 4361 | ITEM *cur_item; |
| 4362 | |
| 4363 | /* Initialize curses */ |
| 4364 | initscr(); |
| 4365 | cbreak(); |
| 4366 | noecho(); |
| 4367 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); |
| 4368 | |
| 4369 | /* Initialize items */ |
| 4370 | n_choices = ARRAY_SIZE(choices); |
| 4371 | my_items = (ITEM **)calloc(n_choices + 1, sizeof(ITEM *)); |
| 4372 | for(i = 0; i < n_choices; ++i) |
| 4373 | my_items[i] = new_item(choices[i], choices[i]); |
| 4374 | my_items[n_choices] = (ITEM *)NULL; |
| 4375 | |
| 4376 | my_menu = new_menu((ITEM **)my_items); |
| 4377 | |
| 4378 | /* Make the menu multi valued */ |
| 4379 | menu_opts_off(my_menu, O_ONEVALUE); |
| 4380 | |
| 4381 | mvprintw(LINES - 3, 0, "Use <SPACE> to select or unselect an item."); |
| 4382 | mvprintw(LINES - 2, 0, "<ENTER> to see presently selected items(F1 to Exit)"); |
| 4383 | post_menu(my_menu); |
| 4384 | refresh(); |
| 4385 | |
| 4386 | while((c = getch()) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 4387 | { switch(c) |
| 4388 | { case KEY_DOWN: |
| 4389 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_DOWN_ITEM); |
| 4390 | break; |
| 4391 | case KEY_UP: |
| 4392 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_UP_ITEM); |
| 4393 | break; |
| 4394 | case ' ': |
| 4395 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_TOGGLE_ITEM); |
| 4396 | break; |
| 4397 | case 10: /* Enter */ |
| 4398 | { char temp[200]; |
| 4399 | ITEM **items; |
| 4400 | |
| 4401 | items = menu_items(my_menu); |
| 4402 | temp[0] = '\0'; |
| 4403 | for(i = 0; i < item_count(my_menu); ++i) |
| 4404 | if(item_value(items[i]) == TRUE) |
| 4405 | { strcat(temp, item_name(items[i])); |
| 4406 | strcat(temp, " "); |
| 4407 | } |
| 4408 | move(20, 0); |
| 4409 | clrtoeol(); |
| 4410 | mvprintw(20, 0, temp); |
| 4411 | refresh(); |
| 4412 | } |
| 4413 | break; |
| 4414 | } |
| 4415 | } |
| 4416 | |
| 4417 | free_item(my_items[0]); |
| 4418 | free_item(my_items[1]); |
| 4419 | free_menu(my_menu); |
| 4420 | endwin(); |
| 4421 | } |
| 4422 | </span></font> |
| 4423 | </pre></td> |
| 4424 | </tr> |
| 4425 | </table> |
| 4426 | </div> |
| 4427 | <p>Whew, A lot of new functions. Let's take them one after another. |
| 4428 | Firstly, the REQ_TOGGLE_ITEM. In a multi-valued menu, the user |
| 4429 | should be allowed to select or un select more than one item. The |
| 4430 | request REQ_TOGGLE_ITEM toggles the present selection. In this case |
| 4431 | when space is pressed REQ_TOGGLE_ITEM request is sent to |
| 4432 | menu_driver to achieve the result.</p> |
| 4433 | <p>Now when the user presses <ENTER> we show the items he |
| 4434 | presently selected. First we find out the items associated with the |
| 4435 | menu using the function menu_items(). Then we loop through the |
| 4436 | items to find out if the item is selected or not. The function |
| 4437 | item_value() returns TRUE if an item is selected. The function |
| 4438 | item_count() returns the number of items in the menu. The item name |
| 4439 | can be found with item_name(). You can also find the description |
| 4440 | associated with an item using item_description().</p> |
| 4441 | </div> |
| 4442 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 4443 | <hr> |
| 4444 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="MENUOPT" id="MENUOPT">17.8. Menu |
| 4445 | Options</a></h3> |
| 4446 | <p>Well, by this time you must be itching for some difference in |
| 4447 | your menu, with lots of functionality. I know. You want Colors !!!. |
| 4448 | You want to create nice menus similar to those text mode <a href= |
| 4449 | "http://www.jersey.net/~debinjoe/games/" target="_top">dos |
| 4450 | games</a>. The functions set_menu_fore() and set_menu_back() can be |
| 4451 | used to change the attribute of the selected item and unselected |
| 4452 | item. The names are misleading. They don't change menu's foreground |
| 4453 | or background which would have been useless.</p> |
| 4454 | <p>The function set_menu_grey() can be used to set the display |
| 4455 | attribute for the non-selectable items in the menu. This brings us |
| 4456 | to the interesting option for an item the one and only |
| 4457 | O_SELECTABLE. We can turn it off by the function item_opts_off() |
| 4458 | and after that that item is not selectable. It's like a grayed item |
| 4459 | in those fancy windows menus. Let's put these concepts in practice |
| 4460 | with this example</p> |
| 4461 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="MMEAT" id="MMEAT"></a> |
| 4462 | <p><b>Example 23. Menu Options example</b></p> |
| 4463 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 4464 | <tr> |
| 4465 | <td> |
| 4466 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 4467 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 4468 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <menu.h> |
| 4469 | |
| 4470 | #define ARRAY_SIZE(a) (sizeof(a) / sizeof(a[0])) |
| 4471 | #define CTRLD 4 |
| 4472 | |
| 4473 | char *choices[] = { |
| 4474 | "Choice 1", |
| 4475 | "Choice 2", |
| 4476 | "Choice 3", |
| 4477 | "Choice 4", |
| 4478 | "Choice 5", |
| 4479 | "Choice 6", |
| 4480 | "Choice 7", |
| 4481 | "Exit", |
| 4482 | }; |
| 4483 | |
| 4484 | int main() |
| 4485 | { ITEM **my_items; |
| 4486 | int c; |
| 4487 | MENU *my_menu; |
| 4488 | int n_choices, i; |
| 4489 | ITEM *cur_item; |
| 4490 | |
| 4491 | /* Initialize curses */ |
| 4492 | initscr(); |
| 4493 | start_color(); |
| 4494 | cbreak(); |
| 4495 | noecho(); |
| 4496 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); |
| 4497 | init_pair(1, COLOR_RED, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 4498 | init_pair(2, COLOR_GREEN, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 4499 | init_pair(3, COLOR_MAGENTA, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 4500 | |
| 4501 | /* Initialize items */ |
| 4502 | n_choices = ARRAY_SIZE(choices); |
| 4503 | my_items = (ITEM **)calloc(n_choices + 1, sizeof(ITEM *)); |
| 4504 | for(i = 0; i < n_choices; ++i) |
| 4505 | my_items[i] = new_item(choices[i], choices[i]); |
| 4506 | my_items[n_choices] = (ITEM *)NULL; |
| 4507 | item_opts_off(my_items[3], O_SELECTABLE); |
| 4508 | item_opts_off(my_items[6], O_SELECTABLE); |
| 4509 | |
| 4510 | /* Create menu */ |
| 4511 | my_menu = new_menu((ITEM **)my_items); |
| 4512 | |
| 4513 | /* Set fore ground and back ground of the menu */ |
| 4514 | set_menu_fore(my_menu, COLOR_PAIR(1) | A_REVERSE); |
| 4515 | set_menu_back(my_menu, COLOR_PAIR(2)); |
| 4516 | set_menu_grey(my_menu, COLOR_PAIR(3)); |
| 4517 | |
| 4518 | /* Post the menu */ |
| 4519 | mvprintw(LINES - 3, 0, "Press <ENTER> to see the option selected"); |
| 4520 | mvprintw(LINES - 2, 0, "Up and Down arrow keys to naviage (F1 to Exit)"); |
| 4521 | post_menu(my_menu); |
| 4522 | refresh(); |
| 4523 | |
| 4524 | while((c = getch()) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 4525 | { switch(c) |
| 4526 | { case KEY_DOWN: |
| 4527 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_DOWN_ITEM); |
| 4528 | break; |
| 4529 | case KEY_UP: |
| 4530 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_UP_ITEM); |
| 4531 | break; |
| 4532 | case 10: /* Enter */ |
| 4533 | move(20, 0); |
| 4534 | clrtoeol(); |
| 4535 | mvprintw(20, 0, "Item selected is : %s", |
| 4536 | item_name(current_item(my_menu))); |
| 4537 | pos_menu_cursor(my_menu); |
| 4538 | break; |
| 4539 | } |
| 4540 | } |
| 4541 | unpost_menu(my_menu); |
| 4542 | for(i = 0; i < n_choices; ++i) |
| 4543 | free_item(my_items[i]); |
| 4544 | free_menu(my_menu); |
| 4545 | endwin(); |
| 4546 | } |
| 4547 | </span></font> |
| 4548 | </pre></td> |
| 4549 | </tr> |
| 4550 | </table> |
| 4551 | </div> |
| 4552 | </div> |
| 4553 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 4554 | <hr> |
| 4555 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="MENUUSERPTR" id="MENUUSERPTR">17.9. The |
| 4556 | useful User Pointer</a></h3> |
| 4557 | <p>We can associate a user pointer with each item in the menu. It |
| 4558 | works the same way as user pointer in panels. It's not touched by |
| 4559 | menu system. You can store any thing you like in that. I usually |
| 4560 | use it to store the function to be executed when the menu option is |
| 4561 | chosen (It's selected and may be the user pressed |
| 4562 | <ENTER>);</p> |
| 4563 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="MMEUS" id="MMEUS"></a> |
| 4564 | <p><b>Example 24. Menu User Pointer Usage</b></p> |
| 4565 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 4566 | <tr> |
| 4567 | <td> |
| 4568 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 4569 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 4570 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <curses.h> |
| 4571 | #include <menu.h> |
| 4572 | |
| 4573 | #define ARRAY_SIZE(a) (sizeof(a) / sizeof(a[0])) |
| 4574 | #define CTRLD 4 |
| 4575 | |
| 4576 | char *choices[] = { |
| 4577 | "Choice 1", |
| 4578 | "Choice 2", |
| 4579 | "Choice 3", |
| 4580 | "Choice 4", |
| 4581 | "Choice 5", |
| 4582 | "Choice 6", |
| 4583 | "Choice 7", |
| 4584 | "Exit", |
| 4585 | }; |
| 4586 | void func(char *name); |
| 4587 | |
| 4588 | int main() |
| 4589 | { ITEM **my_items; |
| 4590 | int c; |
| 4591 | MENU *my_menu; |
| 4592 | int n_choices, i; |
| 4593 | ITEM *cur_item; |
| 4594 | |
| 4595 | /* Initialize curses */ |
| 4596 | initscr(); |
| 4597 | start_color(); |
| 4598 | cbreak(); |
| 4599 | noecho(); |
| 4600 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); |
| 4601 | init_pair(1, COLOR_RED, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 4602 | init_pair(2, COLOR_GREEN, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 4603 | init_pair(3, COLOR_MAGENTA, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 4604 | |
| 4605 | /* Initialize items */ |
| 4606 | n_choices = ARRAY_SIZE(choices); |
| 4607 | my_items = (ITEM **)calloc(n_choices + 1, sizeof(ITEM *)); |
| 4608 | for(i = 0; i < n_choices; ++i) |
| 4609 | { my_items[i] = new_item(choices[i], choices[i]); |
| 4610 | /* Set the user pointer */ |
| 4611 | set_item_userptr(my_items[i], func); |
| 4612 | } |
| 4613 | my_items[n_choices] = (ITEM *)NULL; |
| 4614 | |
| 4615 | /* Create menu */ |
| 4616 | my_menu = new_menu((ITEM **)my_items); |
| 4617 | |
| 4618 | /* Post the menu */ |
| 4619 | mvprintw(LINES - 3, 0, "Press <ENTER> to see the option selected"); |
| 4620 | mvprintw(LINES - 2, 0, "Up and Down arrow keys to naviage (F1 to Exit)"); |
| 4621 | post_menu(my_menu); |
| 4622 | refresh(); |
| 4623 | |
| 4624 | while((c = getch()) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 4625 | { switch(c) |
| 4626 | { case KEY_DOWN: |
| 4627 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_DOWN_ITEM); |
| 4628 | break; |
| 4629 | case KEY_UP: |
| 4630 | menu_driver(my_menu, REQ_UP_ITEM); |
| 4631 | break; |
| 4632 | case 10: /* Enter */ |
| 4633 | { ITEM *cur; |
| 4634 | void (*p)(char *); |
| 4635 | |
| 4636 | cur = current_item(my_menu); |
| 4637 | p = item_userptr(cur); |
| 4638 | p((char *)item_name(cur)); |
| 4639 | pos_menu_cursor(my_menu); |
| 4640 | break; |
| 4641 | } |
| 4642 | break; |
| 4643 | } |
| 4644 | } |
| 4645 | unpost_menu(my_menu); |
| 4646 | for(i = 0; i < n_choices; ++i) |
| 4647 | free_item(my_items[i]); |
| 4648 | free_menu(my_menu); |
| 4649 | endwin(); |
| 4650 | } |
| 4651 | |
| 4652 | void func(char *name) |
| 4653 | { move(20, 0); |
| 4654 | clrtoeol(); |
| 4655 | mvprintw(20, 0, "Item selected is : %s", name); |
| 4656 | } </span></font> |
| 4657 | </pre></td> |
| 4658 | </tr> |
| 4659 | </table> |
| 4660 | </div> |
| 4661 | </div> |
| 4662 | </div> |
| 4663 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 4664 | <hr> |
| 4665 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="FORMS" id="FORMS">18. Forms |
| 4666 | Library</a></h2> |
| 4667 | <p>Well. If you have seen those forms on web pages which take input |
| 4668 | from users and do various kinds of things, you might be wondering |
| 4669 | how would any one create such forms in text mode display. It's |
| 4670 | quite difficult to write those nifty forms in plain ncurses. Forms |
| 4671 | library tries to provide a basic frame work to build and maintain |
| 4672 | forms with ease. It has lot of features(functions) which manage |
| 4673 | validation, dynamic expansion of fields etc.. Let's see it in full |
| 4674 | flow.</p> |
| 4675 | <p>A form is a collection of fields; each field can be either a |
| 4676 | label(static text) or a data-entry location. The forms also library |
| 4677 | provides functions to divide forms into multiple pages.</p> |
| 4678 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 4679 | <hr> |
| 4680 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="FORMBASICS" id="FORMBASICS">18.1. The |
| 4681 | Basics</a></h3> |
| 4682 | <p>Forms are created in much the same way as menus. First the |
| 4683 | fields related to the form are created with new_field(). You can |
| 4684 | set options for the fields, so that they can be displayed with some |
| 4685 | fancy attributes, validated before the field looses focus etc.. |
| 4686 | Then the fields are attached to form. After this, the form can be |
| 4687 | posted to display and is ready to receive inputs. On the similar |
| 4688 | lines to menu_driver(), the form is manipulated with form_driver(). |
| 4689 | We can send requests to form_driver to move focus to a certain |
| 4690 | field, move cursor to end of the field etc.. After the user enters |
| 4691 | values in the fields and validation done, form can be unposted and |
| 4692 | memory allocated can be freed.</p> |
| 4693 | <p>The general flow of control of a forms program looks like |
| 4694 | this.</p> |
| 4695 | <ol type="1"> |
| 4696 | <li> |
| 4697 | <p>Initialize curses</p> |
| 4698 | </li> |
| 4699 | <li> |
| 4700 | <p>Create fields using new_field(). You can specify the height and |
| 4701 | width of the field, and its position on the form.</p> |
| 4702 | </li> |
| 4703 | <li> |
| 4704 | <p>Create the forms with new_form() by specifying the fields to be |
| 4705 | attached with.</p> |
| 4706 | </li> |
| 4707 | <li> |
| 4708 | <p>Post the form with form_post() and refresh the screen.</p> |
| 4709 | </li> |
| 4710 | <li> |
| 4711 | <p>Process the user requests with a loop and do necessary updates |
| 4712 | to form with form_driver.</p> |
| 4713 | </li> |
| 4714 | <li> |
| 4715 | <p>Unpost the menu with form_unpost()</p> |
| 4716 | </li> |
| 4717 | <li> |
| 4718 | <p>Free the memory allocated to menu by free_form()</p> |
| 4719 | </li> |
| 4720 | <li> |
| 4721 | <p>Free the memory allocated to the items with free_field()</p> |
| 4722 | </li> |
| 4723 | <li> |
| 4724 | <p>End curses</p> |
| 4725 | </li> |
| 4726 | </ol> |
| 4727 | <p>As you can see, working with forms library is much similar to |
| 4728 | handling menu library. The following examples will explore various |
| 4729 | aspects of form processing. Let's start the journey with a simple |
| 4730 | example. first.</p> |
| 4731 | </div> |
| 4732 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 4733 | <hr> |
| 4734 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="COMPILEFORMS" id="COMPILEFORMS">18.2. |
| 4735 | Compiling With the Forms Library</a></h3> |
| 4736 | <p>To use forms library functions, you have to include form.h and |
| 4737 | to link the program with forms library the flag -lform should be |
| 4738 | added along with -lncurses in that order.</p> |
| 4739 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 4740 | <tr> |
| 4741 | <td> |
| 4742 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 4743 | <font color="#000000"> #include <form.h> |
| 4744 | . |
| 4745 | . |
| 4746 | . |
| 4747 | |
| 4748 | compile and link: gcc <program file> -lform -lncurses</font> |
| 4749 | </pre></td> |
| 4750 | </tr> |
| 4751 | </table> |
| 4752 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="FFOSI" id="FFOSI"></a> |
| 4753 | <p><b>Example 25. Forms Basics</b></p> |
| 4754 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 4755 | <tr> |
| 4756 | <td> |
| 4757 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 4758 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 4759 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <form.h> |
| 4760 | |
| 4761 | int main() |
| 4762 | { FIELD *field[3]; |
| 4763 | FORM *my_form; |
| 4764 | int ch; |
| 4765 | |
| 4766 | /* Initialize curses */ |
| 4767 | initscr(); |
| 4768 | cbreak(); |
| 4769 | noecho(); |
| 4770 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); |
| 4771 | |
| 4772 | /* Initialize the fields */ |
| 4773 | field[0] = new_field(1, 10, 4, 18, 0, 0); |
| 4774 | field[1] = new_field(1, 10, 6, 18, 0, 0); |
| 4775 | field[2] = NULL; |
| 4776 | |
| 4777 | /* Set field options */ |
| 4778 | set_field_back(field[0], A_UNDERLINE); /* Print a line for the option */ |
| 4779 | field_opts_off(field[0], O_AUTOSKIP); /* Don't go to next field when this */ |
| 4780 | /* Field is filled up */ |
| 4781 | set_field_back(field[1], A_UNDERLINE); |
| 4782 | field_opts_off(field[1], O_AUTOSKIP); |
| 4783 | |
| 4784 | /* Create the form and post it */ |
| 4785 | my_form = new_form(field); |
| 4786 | post_form(my_form); |
| 4787 | refresh(); |
| 4788 | |
| 4789 | mvprintw(4, 10, "Value 1:"); |
| 4790 | mvprintw(6, 10, "Value 2:"); |
| 4791 | refresh(); |
| 4792 | |
| 4793 | /* Loop through to get user requests */ |
| 4794 | while((ch = getch()) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 4795 | { switch(ch) |
| 4796 | { case KEY_DOWN: |
| 4797 | /* Go to next field */ |
| 4798 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_NEXT_FIELD); |
| 4799 | /* Go to the end of the present buffer */ |
| 4800 | /* Leaves nicely at the last character */ |
| 4801 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_END_LINE); |
| 4802 | break; |
| 4803 | case KEY_UP: |
| 4804 | /* Go to previous field */ |
| 4805 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_PREV_FIELD); |
| 4806 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_END_LINE); |
| 4807 | break; |
| 4808 | default: |
| 4809 | /* If this is a normal character, it gets */ |
| 4810 | /* Printed */ |
| 4811 | form_driver(my_form, ch); |
| 4812 | break; |
| 4813 | } |
| 4814 | } |
| 4815 | |
| 4816 | /* Un post form and free the memory */ |
| 4817 | unpost_form(my_form); |
| 4818 | free_form(my_form); |
| 4819 | free_field(field[0]); |
| 4820 | free_field(field[1]); |
| 4821 | |
| 4822 | endwin(); |
| 4823 | return 0; |
| 4824 | }</span></font> |
| 4825 | </pre></td> |
| 4826 | </tr> |
| 4827 | </table> |
| 4828 | </div> |
| 4829 | <p>Above example is pretty straight forward. It creates two fields |
| 4830 | with <var class="LITERAL">new_field()</var>. new_field() takes |
| 4831 | height, width, starty, startx, number of offscreen rows and number |
| 4832 | of additional working buffers. The fifth argument number of |
| 4833 | offscreen rows specifies how much of the field to be shown. If it |
| 4834 | is zero, the entire field is always displayed otherwise the form |
| 4835 | will be scrollable when the user accesses not displayed parts of |
| 4836 | the field. The forms library allocates one buffer per field to |
| 4837 | store the data user enters. Using the last parameter to new_field() |
| 4838 | we can specify it to allocate some additional buffers. These can be |
| 4839 | used for any purpose you like.</p> |
| 4840 | <p>After creating the fields, back ground attribute of both of them |
| 4841 | is set to an underscore with set_field_back(). The AUTOSKIP option |
| 4842 | is turned off using field_opts_off(). If this option is turned on, |
| 4843 | focus will move to the next field in the form once the active field |
| 4844 | is filled up completely.</p> |
| 4845 | <p>After attaching the fields to the form, it is posted. Here on, |
| 4846 | user inputs are processed in the while loop, by making |
| 4847 | corresponding requests to form_driver. The details of all the |
| 4848 | requests to the form_driver() are explained later.</p> |
| 4849 | </div> |
| 4850 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 4851 | <hr> |
| 4852 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="PLAYFIELDS" id="PLAYFIELDS">18.3. |
| 4853 | Playing with Fields</a></h3> |
| 4854 | <p>Each form field is associated with a lot of attributes. They can |
| 4855 | be manipulated to get the required effect and to have fun !!!. So |
| 4856 | why wait?</p> |
| 4857 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 4858 | <hr> |
| 4859 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="FETCHINFO" id="FETCHINFO">18.3.1. |
| 4860 | Fetching Size and Location of Field</a></h4> |
| 4861 | <p>The parameters we have given at the time of creation of a field |
| 4862 | can be retrieved with field_info(). It returns height, width, |
| 4863 | starty, startx, number of offscreen rows, and number of additional |
| 4864 | buffers into the parameters given to it. It is a sort of inverse of |
| 4865 | new_field().</p> |
| 4866 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 4867 | <tr> |
| 4868 | <td> |
| 4869 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 4870 | <font color= |
| 4871 | "#000000">int field_info( FIELD *field, /* field from which to fetch */ |
| 4872 | int *height, *int width, /* field size */ |
| 4873 | int *top, int *left, /* upper left corner */ |
| 4874 | int *offscreen, /* number of offscreen rows */ |
| 4875 | int *nbuf); /* number of working buffers */</font> |
| 4876 | </pre></td> |
| 4877 | </tr> |
| 4878 | </table> |
| 4879 | </div> |
| 4880 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 4881 | <hr> |
| 4882 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="MOVEFIELD" id="MOVEFIELD">18.3.2. Moving |
| 4883 | the field</a></h4> |
| 4884 | <p>The location of the field can be moved to a different position |
| 4885 | with move_field().</p> |
| 4886 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 4887 | <tr> |
| 4888 | <td> |
| 4889 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 4890 | <font color= |
| 4891 | "#000000">int move_field( FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 4892 | int top, int left); /* new upper-left corner */</font> |
| 4893 | </pre></td> |
| 4894 | </tr> |
| 4895 | </table> |
| 4896 | <p>As usual, the changed position can be queried with |
| 4897 | field_infor().</p> |
| 4898 | </div> |
| 4899 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 4900 | <hr> |
| 4901 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="JUSTIFYFIELD" id="JUSTIFYFIELD">18.3.3. |
| 4902 | Field Justification</a></h4> |
| 4903 | <p>The justification to be done for the field can be fixed using |
| 4904 | the function set_field_just().</p> |
| 4905 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 4906 | <tr> |
| 4907 | <td> |
| 4908 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 4909 | <font color= |
| 4910 | "#000000"> int set_field_just(FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 4911 | int justmode); /* mode to set */ |
| 4912 | int field_just(FIELD *field); /* fetch justify mode of field */</font> |
| 4913 | </pre></td> |
| 4914 | </tr> |
| 4915 | </table> |
| 4916 | <p>The justification mode valued accepted and returned by these |
| 4917 | functions are NO_JUSTIFICATION, JUSTIFY_RIGHT, JUSTIFY_LEFT, or |
| 4918 | JUSTIFY_CENTER.</p> |
| 4919 | </div> |
| 4920 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 4921 | <hr> |
| 4922 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="FIELDDISPATTRIB" id= |
| 4923 | "FIELDDISPATTRIB">18.3.4. Field Display Attributes</a></h4> |
| 4924 | <p>As you have seen, in the above example, display attribute for |
| 4925 | the fields can be set with set_field_fore() and setfield_back(). |
| 4926 | These functions set foreground and background attribute of the |
| 4927 | fields. You can also specify a pad character which will be filled |
| 4928 | in the unfilled portion of the field. The pad character is set with |
| 4929 | a call to set_field_pad(). Default pad value is a space. The |
| 4930 | functions field_fore(), field_back, field_pad() can be used to |
| 4931 | query the present foreground, background attributes and pad |
| 4932 | character for the field. The following list gives the usage of |
| 4933 | functions.</p> |
| 4934 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 4935 | <tr> |
| 4936 | <td> |
| 4937 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 4938 | <font color= |
| 4939 | "#000000"> int set_field_fore(FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 4940 | chtype attr); /* attribute to set */ |
| 4941 | |
| 4942 | chtype field_fore(FIELD *field); /* field to query */ |
| 4943 | /* returns foreground attribute */ |
| 4944 | |
| 4945 | int set_field_back(FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 4946 | chtype attr); /* attribute to set */ |
| 4947 | |
| 4948 | chtype field_back(FIELD *field); /* field to query */ |
| 4949 | /* returns background attribute */ |
| 4950 | |
| 4951 | int set_field_pad(FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 4952 | int pad); /* pad character to set */ |
| 4953 | |
| 4954 | chtype field_pad(FIELD *field); /* field to query */ |
| 4955 | /* returns present pad character */ </font> |
| 4956 | </pre></td> |
| 4957 | </tr> |
| 4958 | </table> |
| 4959 | <p>Though above functions seem quite simple, using colors with |
| 4960 | set_field_fore() may be frustrating in the beginning. Let me first |
| 4961 | explain about foreground and background attributes of a field. The |
| 4962 | foreground attribute is associated with the character. That means a |
| 4963 | character in the field is printed with the attribute you have set |
| 4964 | with set_field_fore(). Background attribute is the attribute used |
| 4965 | to fill background of field, whether any character is there or not. |
| 4966 | So what about colors? Since colors are always defined in pairs, |
| 4967 | what is the right way to display colored fields? Here's an example |
| 4968 | clarifying color attributes.</p> |
| 4969 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="FFOAT" id="FFOAT"></a> |
| 4970 | <p><b>Example 26. Form Attributes example</b></p> |
| 4971 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 4972 | <tr> |
| 4973 | <td> |
| 4974 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 4975 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 4976 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <form.h> |
| 4977 | |
| 4978 | int main() |
| 4979 | { FIELD *field[3]; |
| 4980 | FORM *my_form; |
| 4981 | int ch; |
| 4982 | |
| 4983 | /* Initialize curses */ |
| 4984 | initscr(); |
| 4985 | start_color(); |
| 4986 | cbreak(); |
| 4987 | noecho(); |
| 4988 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); |
| 4989 | |
| 4990 | /* Initialize few color pairs */ |
| 4991 | init_pair(1, COLOR_WHITE, COLOR_BLUE); |
| 4992 | init_pair(2, COLOR_WHITE, COLOR_BLUE); |
| 4993 | |
| 4994 | /* Initialize the fields */ |
| 4995 | field[0] = new_field(1, 10, 4, 18, 0, 0); |
| 4996 | field[1] = new_field(1, 10, 6, 18, 0, 0); |
| 4997 | field[2] = NULL; |
| 4998 | |
| 4999 | /* Set field options */ |
| 5000 | set_field_fore(field[0], COLOR_PAIR(1));/* Put the field with blue background */ |
| 5001 | set_field_back(field[0], COLOR_PAIR(2));/* and white foreground (characters */ |
| 5002 | /* are printed in white */ |
| 5003 | field_opts_off(field[0], O_AUTOSKIP); /* Don't go to next field when this */ |
| 5004 | /* Field is filled up */ |
| 5005 | set_field_back(field[1], A_UNDERLINE); |
| 5006 | field_opts_off(field[1], O_AUTOSKIP); |
| 5007 | |
| 5008 | /* Create the form and post it */ |
| 5009 | my_form = new_form(field); |
| 5010 | post_form(my_form); |
| 5011 | refresh(); |
| 5012 | |
| 5013 | set_current_field(my_form, field[0]); /* Set focus to the colored field */ |
| 5014 | mvprintw(4, 10, "Value 1:"); |
| 5015 | mvprintw(6, 10, "Value 2:"); |
| 5016 | mvprintw(LINES - 2, 0, "Use UP, DOWN arrow keys to switch between fields"); |
| 5017 | refresh(); |
| 5018 | |
| 5019 | /* Loop through to get user requests */ |
| 5020 | while((ch = getch()) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 5021 | { switch(ch) |
| 5022 | { case KEY_DOWN: |
| 5023 | /* Go to next field */ |
| 5024 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_NEXT_FIELD); |
| 5025 | /* Go to the end of the present buffer */ |
| 5026 | /* Leaves nicely at the last character */ |
| 5027 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_END_LINE); |
| 5028 | break; |
| 5029 | case KEY_UP: |
| 5030 | /* Go to previous field */ |
| 5031 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_PREV_FIELD); |
| 5032 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_END_LINE); |
| 5033 | break; |
| 5034 | default: |
| 5035 | /* If this is a normal character, it gets */ |
| 5036 | /* Printed */ |
| 5037 | form_driver(my_form, ch); |
| 5038 | break; |
| 5039 | } |
| 5040 | } |
| 5041 | |
| 5042 | /* Un post form and free the memory */ |
| 5043 | unpost_form(my_form); |
| 5044 | free_form(my_form); |
| 5045 | free_field(field[0]); |
| 5046 | free_field(field[1]); |
| 5047 | |
| 5048 | endwin(); |
| 5049 | return 0; |
| 5050 | }</span></font> |
| 5051 | </pre></td> |
| 5052 | </tr> |
| 5053 | </table> |
| 5054 | </div> |
| 5055 | <p>Play with the color pairs and try to understand the foreground |
| 5056 | and background attributes. In my programs using color attributes, I |
| 5057 | usually set only the background with set_field_back(). Curses |
| 5058 | simply doesn't allow defining individual color attributes.</p> |
| 5059 | </div> |
| 5060 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 5061 | <hr> |
| 5062 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="FIELDOPTIONBITS" id= |
| 5063 | "FIELDOPTIONBITS">18.3.5. Field Option Bits</a></h4> |
| 5064 | <p>There is also a large collection of field option bits you can |
| 5065 | set to control various aspects of forms processing. You can |
| 5066 | manipulate them with these functions:</p> |
| 5067 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5068 | <tr> |
| 5069 | <td> |
| 5070 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5071 | <font color= |
| 5072 | "#000000">int set_field_opts(FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 5073 | int attr); /* attribute to set */ |
| 5074 | |
| 5075 | int field_opts_on(FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 5076 | int attr); /* attributes to turn on */ |
| 5077 | |
| 5078 | int field_opts_off(FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 5079 | int attr); /* attributes to turn off */ |
| 5080 | |
| 5081 | int field_opts(FIELD *field); /* field to query */ </font> |
| 5082 | </pre></td> |
| 5083 | </tr> |
| 5084 | </table> |
| 5085 | <p>The function set_field_opts() can be used to directly set |
| 5086 | attributes of a field or you can choose to switch a few attributes |
| 5087 | on and off with field_opts_on() and field_opts_off() selectively. |
| 5088 | Anytime you can query the attributes of a field with field_opts(). |
| 5089 | The following is the list of available options. By default, all |
| 5090 | options are on.</p> |
| 5091 | <div class="VARIABLELIST"> |
| 5092 | <dl> |
| 5093 | <dt>O_VISIBLE</dt> |
| 5094 | <dd> |
| 5095 | <p>Controls whether the field is visible on the screen. Can be used |
| 5096 | during form processing to hide or pop up fields depending on the |
| 5097 | value of parent fields.</p> |
| 5098 | </dd> |
| 5099 | <dt>O_ACTIVE</dt> |
| 5100 | <dd> |
| 5101 | <p>Controls whether the field is active during forms processing |
| 5102 | (i.e. visited by form navigation keys). Can be used to make labels |
| 5103 | or derived fields with buffer values alterable by the forms |
| 5104 | application, not the user.</p> |
| 5105 | </dd> |
| 5106 | <dt>O_PUBLIC</dt> |
| 5107 | <dd> |
| 5108 | <p>Controls whether data is displayed during field entry. If this |
| 5109 | option is turned off on a field, the library will accept and edit |
| 5110 | data in that field, but it will not be displayed and the visible |
| 5111 | field cursor will not move. You can turn off the O_PUBLIC bit to |
| 5112 | define password fields.</p> |
| 5113 | </dd> |
| 5114 | <dt>O_EDIT</dt> |
| 5115 | <dd> |
| 5116 | <p>Controls whether the field's data can be modified. When this |
| 5117 | option is off, all editing requests except <var class= |
| 5118 | "LITERAL">REQ_PREV_CHOICE</var> and <var class= |
| 5119 | "LITERAL">REQ_NEXT_CHOICE</var>will fail. Such read-only fields may |
| 5120 | be useful for help messages.</p> |
| 5121 | </dd> |
| 5122 | <dt>O_WRAP</dt> |
| 5123 | <dd> |
| 5124 | <p>Controls word-wrapping in multi-line fields. Normally, when any |
| 5125 | character of a (blank-separated) word reaches the end of the |
| 5126 | current line, the entire word is wrapped to the next line (assuming |
| 5127 | there is one). When this option is off, the word will be split |
| 5128 | across the line break.</p> |
| 5129 | </dd> |
| 5130 | <dt>O_BLANK</dt> |
| 5131 | <dd> |
| 5132 | <p>Controls field blanking. When this option is on, entering a |
| 5133 | character at the first field position erases the entire field |
| 5134 | (except for the just-entered character).</p> |
| 5135 | </dd> |
| 5136 | <dt>O_AUTOSKIP</dt> |
| 5137 | <dd> |
| 5138 | <p>Controls automatic skip to next field when this one fills. |
| 5139 | Normally, when the forms user tries to type more data into a field |
| 5140 | than will fit, the editing location jumps to next field. When this |
| 5141 | option is off, the user's cursor will hang at the end of the field. |
| 5142 | This option is ignored in dynamic fields that have not reached |
| 5143 | their size limit.</p> |
| 5144 | </dd> |
| 5145 | <dt>O_NULLOK</dt> |
| 5146 | <dd> |
| 5147 | <p>Controls whether validation is applied to blank fields. |
| 5148 | Normally, it is not; the user can leave a field blank without |
| 5149 | invoking the usual validation check on exit. If this option is off |
| 5150 | on a field, exit from it will invoke a validation check.</p> |
| 5151 | </dd> |
| 5152 | <dt>O_PASSOK</dt> |
| 5153 | <dd> |
| 5154 | <p>Controls whether validation occurs on every exit, or only after |
| 5155 | the field is modified. Normally the latter is true. Setting |
| 5156 | O_PASSOK may be useful if your field's validation function may |
| 5157 | change during forms processing.</p> |
| 5158 | </dd> |
| 5159 | <dt>O_STATIC</dt> |
| 5160 | <dd> |
| 5161 | <p>Controls whether the field is fixed to its initial dimensions. |
| 5162 | If you turn this off, the field becomes dynamic and will stretch to |
| 5163 | fit entered data.</p> |
| 5164 | </dd> |
| 5165 | </dl> |
| 5166 | </div> |
| 5167 | <p>A field's options cannot be changed while the field is currently |
| 5168 | selected. However, options may be changed on posted fields that are |
| 5169 | not current.</p> |
| 5170 | <p>The option values are bit-masks and can be composed with |
| 5171 | logical-or in the obvious way. You have seen the usage of switching |
| 5172 | off O_AUTOSKIP option. The following example clarifies usage of |
| 5173 | some more options. Other options are explained where |
| 5174 | appropriate.</p> |
| 5175 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="FFOOP" id="FFOOP"></a> |
| 5176 | <p><b>Example 27. Field Options Usage example</b></p> |
| 5177 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5178 | <tr> |
| 5179 | <td> |
| 5180 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5181 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 5182 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <form.h> |
| 5183 | |
| 5184 | #define STARTX 15 |
| 5185 | #define STARTY 4 |
| 5186 | #define WIDTH 25 |
| 5187 | |
| 5188 | #define N_FIELDS 3 |
| 5189 | |
| 5190 | int main() |
| 5191 | { FIELD *field[N_FIELDS]; |
| 5192 | FORM *my_form; |
| 5193 | int ch, i; |
| 5194 | |
| 5195 | /* Initialize curses */ |
| 5196 | initscr(); |
| 5197 | cbreak(); |
| 5198 | noecho(); |
| 5199 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); |
| 5200 | |
| 5201 | /* Initialize the fields */ |
| 5202 | for(i = 0; i < N_FIELDS - 1; ++i) |
| 5203 | field[i] = new_field(1, WIDTH, STARTY + i * 2, STARTX, 0, 0); |
| 5204 | field[N_FIELDS - 1] = NULL; |
| 5205 | |
| 5206 | /* Set field options */ |
| 5207 | set_field_back(field[1], A_UNDERLINE); /* Print a line for the option */ |
| 5208 | |
| 5209 | field_opts_off(field[0], O_ACTIVE); /* This field is a static label */ |
| 5210 | field_opts_off(field[1], O_PUBLIC); /* This filed is like a password field*/ |
| 5211 | field_opts_off(field[1], O_AUTOSKIP); /* To avoid entering the same field */ |
| 5212 | /* after last character is entered */ |
| 5213 | |
| 5214 | /* Create the form and post it */ |
| 5215 | my_form = new_form(field); |
| 5216 | post_form(my_form); |
| 5217 | refresh(); |
| 5218 | |
| 5219 | set_field_just(field[0], JUSTIFY_CENTER); /* Center Justification */ |
| 5220 | set_field_buffer(field[0], 0, "This is a static Field"); |
| 5221 | /* Initialize the field */ |
| 5222 | mvprintw(STARTY, STARTX - 10, "Field 1:"); |
| 5223 | mvprintw(STARTY + 2, STARTX - 10, "Field 2:"); |
| 5224 | refresh(); |
| 5225 | |
| 5226 | /* Loop through to get user requests */ |
| 5227 | while((ch = getch()) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 5228 | { switch(ch) |
| 5229 | { case KEY_DOWN: |
| 5230 | /* Go to next field */ |
| 5231 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_NEXT_FIELD); |
| 5232 | /* Go to the end of the present buffer */ |
| 5233 | /* Leaves nicely at the last character */ |
| 5234 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_END_LINE); |
| 5235 | break; |
| 5236 | case KEY_UP: |
| 5237 | /* Go to previous field */ |
| 5238 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_PREV_FIELD); |
| 5239 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_END_LINE); |
| 5240 | break; |
| 5241 | default: |
| 5242 | /* If this is a normal character, it gets */ |
| 5243 | /* Printed */ |
| 5244 | form_driver(my_form, ch); |
| 5245 | break; |
| 5246 | } |
| 5247 | } |
| 5248 | |
| 5249 | /* Un post form and free the memory */ |
| 5250 | unpost_form(my_form); |
| 5251 | free_form(my_form); |
| 5252 | free_field(field[0]); |
| 5253 | free_field(field[1]); |
| 5254 | |
| 5255 | endwin(); |
| 5256 | return 0; |
| 5257 | }</span></font> |
| 5258 | </pre></td> |
| 5259 | </tr> |
| 5260 | </table> |
| 5261 | </div> |
| 5262 | <p>This example, though useless, shows the usage of options. If |
| 5263 | used properly, they can present information very effectively in a |
| 5264 | form. The second field being not O_PUBLIC, does not show the |
| 5265 | characters you are typing.</p> |
| 5266 | </div> |
| 5267 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 5268 | <hr> |
| 5269 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="FIELDSTATUS" id="FIELDSTATUS">18.3.6. |
| 5270 | Field Status</a></h4> |
| 5271 | <p>The field status specifies whether the field has got edited or |
| 5272 | not. It is initially set to FALSE and when user enters something |
| 5273 | and the data buffer gets modified it becomes TRUE. So a field's |
| 5274 | status can be queried to find out whether it has been modified or |
| 5275 | not. The following functions can assist in those operations.</p> |
| 5276 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5277 | <tr> |
| 5278 | <td> |
| 5279 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5280 | <font color= |
| 5281 | "#000000">int set_field_status(FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 5282 | int status); /* status to set */ |
| 5283 | |
| 5284 | int field_status(FIELD *field); /* fetch status of field */</font> |
| 5285 | </pre></td> |
| 5286 | </tr> |
| 5287 | </table> |
| 5288 | <p>It's better to check the field's status only after after leaving |
| 5289 | the field, as data buffer might not have been updated yet as the |
| 5290 | validation is still due. To guarantee that right status is |
| 5291 | returned, call field_status() either (1) in the field's exit |
| 5292 | validation check routine, (2) from the field's or form's |
| 5293 | initialization or termination hooks, or (3) just after a |
| 5294 | REQ_VALIDATION request has been processed by the forms driver</p> |
| 5295 | </div> |
| 5296 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 5297 | <hr> |
| 5298 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="FIELDUSERPTR" id="FIELDUSERPTR">18.3.7. |
| 5299 | Field User Pointer</a></h4> |
| 5300 | <p>Every field structure contains one pointer that can be used by |
| 5301 | the user for various purposes. It is not touched by forms library |
| 5302 | and can be used for any purpose by the user. The following |
| 5303 | functions set and fetch user pointer.</p> |
| 5304 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5305 | <tr> |
| 5306 | <td> |
| 5307 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5308 | <font color="#000000">int set_field_userptr(FIELD *field, |
| 5309 | char *userptr); /* the user pointer you wish to associate */ |
| 5310 | /* with the field */ |
| 5311 | |
| 5312 | char *field_userptr(FIELD *field); /* fetch user pointer of the field */</font> |
| 5313 | </pre></td> |
| 5314 | </tr> |
| 5315 | </table> |
| 5316 | </div> |
| 5317 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 5318 | <hr> |
| 5319 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="VARIABLESIZEFIELDS" id= |
| 5320 | "VARIABLESIZEFIELDS">18.3.8. Variable-Sized Fields</a></h4> |
| 5321 | <p>If you want a dynamically changing field with variable width, |
| 5322 | this is the feature you want to put to full use. This will allow |
| 5323 | the user to enter more data than the original size of the field and |
| 5324 | let the field grow. According to the field orientation it will |
| 5325 | scroll horizontally or vertically to incorporate the new data.</p> |
| 5326 | <p>To make a field dynamically growable, the option O_STATIC should |
| 5327 | be turned off. This can be done with a</p> |
| 5328 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5329 | <tr> |
| 5330 | <td> |
| 5331 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5332 | <font color= |
| 5333 | "#000000"> field_opts_off(field_pointer, O_STATIC);</font> |
| 5334 | </pre></td> |
| 5335 | </tr> |
| 5336 | </table> |
| 5337 | <p>But it's usually not advisable to allow a field to grow |
| 5338 | infinitely. You can set a maximum limit to the growth of the field |
| 5339 | with</p> |
| 5340 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5341 | <tr> |
| 5342 | <td> |
| 5343 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5344 | <font color= |
| 5345 | "#000000">int set_max_field(FIELD *field, /* Field on which to operate */ |
| 5346 | int max_growth); /* maximum growth allowed for the field */</font> |
| 5347 | </pre></td> |
| 5348 | </tr> |
| 5349 | </table> |
| 5350 | <p>The field info for a dynamically growable field can be retrieved |
| 5351 | by</p> |
| 5352 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5353 | <tr> |
| 5354 | <td> |
| 5355 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5356 | <font color= |
| 5357 | "#000000">int dynamic_field_info( FIELD *field, /* Field on which to operate */ |
| 5358 | int *prows, /* number of rows will be filled in this */ |
| 5359 | int *pcols, /* number of columns will be filled in this*/ |
| 5360 | int *pmax) /* maximum allowable growth will be filled */ |
| 5361 | /* in this */</font> |
| 5362 | </pre></td> |
| 5363 | </tr> |
| 5364 | </table> |
| 5365 | Though field_info work as usual, it is advisable to use this |
| 5366 | function to get the proper attributes of a dynamically growable |
| 5367 | field. |
| 5368 | <p>Recall the library routine new_field; a new field created with |
| 5369 | height set to one will be defined to be a one line field. A new |
| 5370 | field created with height greater than one will be defined to be a |
| 5371 | multi line field.</p> |
| 5372 | <p>A one line field with O_STATIC turned off (dynamically growable |
| 5373 | field) will contain a single fixed row, but the number of columns |
| 5374 | can increase if the user enters more data than the initial field |
| 5375 | will hold. The number of columns displayed will remain fixed and |
| 5376 | the additional data will scroll horizontally.</p> |
| 5377 | <p>A multi line field with O_STATIC turned off (dynamically |
| 5378 | growable field) will contain a fixed number of columns, but the |
| 5379 | number of rows can increase if the user enters more data than the |
| 5380 | initial field will hold. The number of rows displayed will remain |
| 5381 | fixed and the additional data will scroll vertically.</p> |
| 5382 | <p>The above two paragraphs pretty much describe a dynamically |
| 5383 | growable field's behavior. The way other parts of forms library |
| 5384 | behaves is described below:</p> |
| 5385 | <ol type="1"> |
| 5386 | <li> |
| 5387 | <p>The field option O_AUTOSKIP will be ignored if the option |
| 5388 | O_STATIC is off and there is no maximum growth specified for the |
| 5389 | field. Currently, O_AUTOSKIP generates an automatic REQ_NEXT_FIELD |
| 5390 | form driver request when the user types in the last character |
| 5391 | position of a field. On a growable field with no maximum growth |
| 5392 | specified, there is no last character position. If a maximum growth |
| 5393 | is specified, the O_AUTOSKIP option will work as normal if the |
| 5394 | field has grown to its maximum size.</p> |
| 5395 | </li> |
| 5396 | <li> |
| 5397 | <p>The field justification will be ignored if the option O_STATIC |
| 5398 | is off. Currently, set_field_just can be used to JUSTIFY_LEFT, |
| 5399 | JUSTIFY_RIGHT, JUSTIFY_CENTER the contents of a one line field. A |
| 5400 | growable one line field will, by definition, grow and scroll |
| 5401 | horizontally and may contain more data than can be justified. The |
| 5402 | return from field_just will be unchanged.</p> |
| 5403 | </li> |
| 5404 | <li> |
| 5405 | <p>The overloaded form driver request REQ_NEW_LINE will operate the |
| 5406 | same way regardless of the O_NL_OVERLOAD form option if the field |
| 5407 | option O_STATIC is off and there is no maximum growth specified for |
| 5408 | the field. Currently, if the form option O_NL_OVERLOAD is on, |
| 5409 | REQ_NEW_LINE implicitly generates a REQ_NEXT_FIELD if called from |
| 5410 | the last line of a field. If a field can grow without bound, there |
| 5411 | is no last line, so REQ_NEW_LINE will never implicitly generate a |
| 5412 | REQ_NEXT_FIELD. If a maximum growth limit is specified and the |
| 5413 | O_NL_OVERLOAD form option is on, REQ_NEW_LINE will only implicitly |
| 5414 | generate REQ_NEXT_FIELD if the field has grown to its maximum size |
| 5415 | and the user is on the last line.</p> |
| 5416 | </li> |
| 5417 | <li> |
| 5418 | <p>The library call dup_field will work as usual; it will duplicate |
| 5419 | the field, including the current buffer size and contents of the |
| 5420 | field being duplicated. Any specified maximum growth will also be |
| 5421 | duplicated.</p> |
| 5422 | </li> |
| 5423 | <li> |
| 5424 | <p>The library call link_field will work as usual; it will |
| 5425 | duplicate all field attributes and share buffers with the field |
| 5426 | being linked. If the O_STATIC field option is subsequently changed |
| 5427 | by a field sharing buffers, how the system reacts to an attempt to |
| 5428 | enter more data into the field than the buffer will currently hold |
| 5429 | will depend on the setting of the option in the current field.</p> |
| 5430 | </li> |
| 5431 | <li> |
| 5432 | <p>The library call field_info will work as usual; the variable |
| 5433 | nrow will contain the value of the original call to new_field. The |
| 5434 | user should use dynamic_field_info, described above, to query the |
| 5435 | current size of the buffer.</p> |
| 5436 | </li> |
| 5437 | </ol> |
| 5438 | <p>Some of the above points make sense only after explaining form |
| 5439 | driver. We will be looking into that in next few sections.</p> |
| 5440 | </div> |
| 5441 | </div> |
| 5442 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 5443 | <hr> |
| 5444 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="FORMWINDOWS" id="FORMWINDOWS">18.4. Form |
| 5445 | Windows</a></h3> |
| 5446 | <p>The form windows concept is pretty much similar to menu windows. |
| 5447 | Every form is associated with a main window and a sub window. The |
| 5448 | form main window displays any title or border associated or |
| 5449 | whatever the user wishes. Then the sub window contains all the |
| 5450 | fields and displays them according to their position. This gives |
| 5451 | the flexibility of manipulating fancy form displaying very |
| 5452 | easily.</p> |
| 5453 | <p>Since this is pretty much similar to menu windows, I am |
| 5454 | providing an example with out much explanation. The functions are |
| 5455 | similar and they work the same way.</p> |
| 5456 | <div class="EXAMPLE"><a name="FFOWI" id="FFOWI"></a> |
| 5457 | <p><b>Example 28. Form Windows Example</b></p> |
| 5458 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5459 | <tr> |
| 5460 | <td> |
| 5461 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5462 | <font color="#000000"><span class= |
| 5463 | "INLINEMEDIAOBJECT">#include <form.h> |
| 5464 | |
| 5465 | void print_in_middle(WINDOW *win, int starty, int startx, int width, char *string, chtype color); |
| 5466 | |
| 5467 | int main() |
| 5468 | { |
| 5469 | FIELD *field[3]; |
| 5470 | FORM *my_form; |
| 5471 | WINDOW *my_form_win; |
| 5472 | int ch, rows, cols; |
| 5473 | |
| 5474 | /* Initialize curses */ |
| 5475 | initscr(); |
| 5476 | start_color(); |
| 5477 | cbreak(); |
| 5478 | noecho(); |
| 5479 | keypad(stdscr, TRUE); |
| 5480 | |
| 5481 | /* Initialize few color pairs */ |
| 5482 | init_pair(1, COLOR_RED, COLOR_BLACK); |
| 5483 | |
| 5484 | /* Initialize the fields */ |
| 5485 | field[0] = new_field(1, 10, 6, 1, 0, 0); |
| 5486 | field[1] = new_field(1, 10, 8, 1, 0, 0); |
| 5487 | field[2] = NULL; |
| 5488 | |
| 5489 | /* Set field options */ |
| 5490 | set_field_back(field[0], A_UNDERLINE); |
| 5491 | field_opts_off(field[0], O_AUTOSKIP); /* Don't go to next field when this */ |
| 5492 | /* Field is filled up */ |
| 5493 | set_field_back(field[1], A_UNDERLINE); |
| 5494 | field_opts_off(field[1], O_AUTOSKIP); |
| 5495 | |
| 5496 | /* Create the form and post it */ |
| 5497 | my_form = new_form(field); |
| 5498 | |
| 5499 | /* Calculate the area required for the form */ |
| 5500 | scale_form(my_form, &rows, &cols); |
| 5501 | |
| 5502 | /* Create the window to be associated with the form */ |
| 5503 | my_form_win = newwin(rows + 4, cols + 4, 4, 4); |
| 5504 | keypad(my_form_win, TRUE); |
| 5505 | |
| 5506 | /* Set main window and sub window */ |
| 5507 | set_form_win(my_form, my_form_win); |
| 5508 | set_form_sub(my_form, derwin(my_form_win, rows, cols, 2, 2)); |
| 5509 | |
| 5510 | /* Print a border around the main window and print a title */ |
| 5511 | box(my_form_win, 0, 0); |
| 5512 | print_in_middle(my_form_win, 1, 0, cols + 4, "My Form", COLOR_PAIR(1)); |
| 5513 | |
| 5514 | post_form(my_form); |
| 5515 | wrefresh(my_form_win); |
| 5516 | |
| 5517 | mvprintw(LINES - 2, 0, "Use UP, DOWN arrow keys to switch between fields"); |
| 5518 | refresh(); |
| 5519 | |
| 5520 | /* Loop through to get user requests */ |
| 5521 | while((ch = wgetch(my_form_win)) != KEY_F(1)) |
| 5522 | { switch(ch) |
| 5523 | { case KEY_DOWN: |
| 5524 | /* Go to next field */ |
| 5525 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_NEXT_FIELD); |
| 5526 | /* Go to the end of the present buffer */ |
| 5527 | /* Leaves nicely at the last character */ |
| 5528 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_END_LINE); |
| 5529 | break; |
| 5530 | case KEY_UP: |
| 5531 | /* Go to previous field */ |
| 5532 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_PREV_FIELD); |
| 5533 | form_driver(my_form, REQ_END_LINE); |
| 5534 | break; |
| 5535 | default: |
| 5536 | /* If this is a normal character, it gets */ |
| 5537 | /* Printed */ |
| 5538 | form_driver(my_form, ch); |
| 5539 | break; |
| 5540 | } |
| 5541 | } |
| 5542 | |
| 5543 | /* Un post form and free the memory */ |
| 5544 | unpost_form(my_form); |
| 5545 | free_form(my_form); |
| 5546 | free_field(field[0]); |
| 5547 | free_field(field[1]); |
| 5548 | |
| 5549 | endwin(); |
| 5550 | return 0; |
| 5551 | } |
| 5552 | |
| 5553 | void print_in_middle(WINDOW *win, int starty, int startx, int width, char *string, chtype color) |
| 5554 | { int length, x, y; |
| 5555 | float temp; |
| 5556 | |
| 5557 | if(win == NULL) |
| 5558 | win = stdscr; |
| 5559 | getyx(win, y, x); |
| 5560 | if(startx != 0) |
| 5561 | x = startx; |
| 5562 | if(starty != 0) |
| 5563 | y = starty; |
| 5564 | if(width == 0) |
| 5565 | width = 80; |
| 5566 | |
| 5567 | length = strlen(string); |
| 5568 | temp = (width - length)/ 2; |
| 5569 | x = startx + (int)temp; |
| 5570 | wattron(win, color); |
| 5571 | mvwprintw(win, y, x, "%s", string); |
| 5572 | wattroff(win, color); |
| 5573 | refresh(); |
| 5574 | }</span></font> |
| 5575 | </pre></td> |
| 5576 | </tr> |
| 5577 | </table> |
| 5578 | </div> |
| 5579 | </div> |
| 5580 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 5581 | <hr> |
| 5582 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="FILEDVALIDATE" id="FILEDVALIDATE">18.5. |
| 5583 | Field Validation</a></h3> |
| 5584 | <p>By default, a field will accept any data input by the user. It |
| 5585 | is possible to attach validation to the field. Then any attempt by |
| 5586 | the user to leave the field, while it contains data that doesn't |
| 5587 | match the validation type will fail. Some validation types also |
| 5588 | have a character-validity check for each time a character is |
| 5589 | entered in the field.</p> |
| 5590 | <p>Validation can be attached to a field with the following |
| 5591 | function.</p> |
| 5592 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5593 | <tr> |
| 5594 | <td> |
| 5595 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5596 | <font color= |
| 5597 | "#000000">int set_field_type(FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 5598 | FIELDTYPE *ftype, /* type to associate */ |
| 5599 | ...); /* additional arguments*/</font> |
| 5600 | </pre></td> |
| 5601 | </tr> |
| 5602 | </table> |
| 5603 | Once set, the validation type for a field can be queried with |
| 5604 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5605 | <tr> |
| 5606 | <td> |
| 5607 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5608 | <font color= |
| 5609 | "#000000">FIELDTYPE *field_type(FIELD *field); /* field to query */</font> |
| 5610 | </pre></td> |
| 5611 | </tr> |
| 5612 | </table> |
| 5613 | <p>The form driver validates the data in a field only when data is |
| 5614 | entered by the end-user. Validation does not occur when</p> |
| 5615 | <ul> |
| 5616 | <li> |
| 5617 | <p>the application program changes the field value by calling |
| 5618 | set_field_buffer.</p> |
| 5619 | </li> |
| 5620 | <li> |
| 5621 | <p>linked field values are changed indirectly -- by changing the |
| 5622 | field to which they are linked</p> |
| 5623 | </li> |
| 5624 | </ul> |
| 5625 | <p>The following are the pre-defined validation types. You can also |
| 5626 | specify custom validation, though it's a bit tricky and |
| 5627 | cumbersome.</p> |
| 5628 | <h1 class="BRIDGEHEAD"><a name="AEN1069" id= |
| 5629 | "AEN1069"></a>TYPE_ALPHA</h1> |
| 5630 | <p>This field type accepts alphabetic data; no blanks, no digits, |
| 5631 | no special characters (this is checked at character-entry time). It |
| 5632 | is set up with:</p> |
| 5633 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5634 | <tr> |
| 5635 | <td> |
| 5636 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5637 | <font color= |
| 5638 | "#000000">int set_field_type(FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 5639 | TYPE_ALPHA, /* type to associate */ |
| 5640 | int width); /* maximum width of field */</font> |
| 5641 | </pre></td> |
| 5642 | </tr> |
| 5643 | </table> |
| 5644 | <p>The width argument sets a minimum width of data. The user has to |
| 5645 | enter at-least width number of characters before he can leave the |
| 5646 | field. Typically you'll want to set this to the field width; if |
| 5647 | it's greater than the field width, the validation check will always |
| 5648 | fail. A minimum width of zero makes field completion optional.</p> |
| 5649 | <h1 class="BRIDGEHEAD"><a name="AEN1073" id= |
| 5650 | "AEN1073"></a>TYPE_ALNUM</h1> |
| 5651 | <p>This field type accepts alphabetic data and digits; no blanks, |
| 5652 | no special characters (this is checked at character-entry time). It |
| 5653 | is set up with:</p> |
| 5654 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5655 | <tr> |
| 5656 | <td> |
| 5657 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5658 | <font color= |
| 5659 | "#000000">int set_field_type(FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 5660 | TYPE_ALNUM, /* type to associate */ |
| 5661 | int width); /* maximum width of field */</font> |
| 5662 | </pre></td> |
| 5663 | </tr> |
| 5664 | </table> |
| 5665 | <p>The width argument sets a minimum width of data. As with |
| 5666 | TYPE_ALPHA, typically you'll want to set this to the field width; |
| 5667 | if it's greater than the field width, the validation check will |
| 5668 | always fail. A minimum width of zero makes field completion |
| 5669 | optional.</p> |
| 5670 | <h1 class="BRIDGEHEAD"><a name="AEN1077" id= |
| 5671 | "AEN1077"></a>TYPE_ENUM</h1> |
| 5672 | <p>This type allows you to restrict a field's values to be among a |
| 5673 | specified set of string values (for example, the two-letter postal |
| 5674 | codes for U.S. states). It is set up with:</p> |
| 5675 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5676 | <tr> |
| 5677 | <td> |
| 5678 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5679 | <font color= |
| 5680 | "#000000">int set_field_type(FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 5681 | TYPE_ENUM, /* type to associate */ |
| 5682 | char **valuelist; /* list of possible values */ |
| 5683 | int checkcase; /* case-sensitive? */ |
| 5684 | int checkunique); /* must specify uniquely? */</font> |
| 5685 | </pre></td> |
| 5686 | </tr> |
| 5687 | </table> |
| 5688 | <p>The valuelist parameter must point at a NULL-terminated list of |
| 5689 | valid strings. The checkcase argument, if true, makes comparison |
| 5690 | with the string case-sensitive.</p> |
| 5691 | <p>When the user exits a TYPE_ENUM field, the validation procedure |
| 5692 | tries to complete the data in the buffer to a valid entry. If a |
| 5693 | complete choice string has been entered, it is of course valid. But |
| 5694 | it is also possible to enter a prefix of a valid string and have it |
| 5695 | completed for you.</p> |
| 5696 | <p>By default, if you enter such a prefix and it matches more than |
| 5697 | one value in the string list, the prefix will be completed to the |
| 5698 | first matching value. But the checkunique argument, if true, |
| 5699 | requires prefix matches to be unique in order to be valid.</p> |
| 5700 | <p>The REQ_NEXT_CHOICE and REQ_PREV_CHOICE input requests can be |
| 5701 | particularly useful with these fields.</p> |
| 5702 | <h1 class="BRIDGEHEAD"><a name="AEN1084" id= |
| 5703 | "AEN1084"></a>TYPE_INTEGER</h1> |
| 5704 | <p>This field type accepts an integer. It is set up as follows:</p> |
| 5705 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5706 | <tr> |
| 5707 | <td> |
| 5708 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5709 | <font color= |
| 5710 | "#000000">int set_field_type(FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 5711 | TYPE_INTEGER, /* type to associate */ |
| 5712 | int padding, /* # places to zero-pad to */ |
| 5713 | int vmin, int vmax); /* valid range */</font> |
| 5714 | </pre></td> |
| 5715 | </tr> |
| 5716 | </table> |
| 5717 | <p>Valid characters consist of an optional leading minus and |
| 5718 | digits. The range check is performed on exit. If the range maximum |
| 5719 | is less than or equal to the minimum, the range is ignored.</p> |
| 5720 | <p>If the value passes its range check, it is padded with as many |
| 5721 | leading zero digits as necessary to meet the padding argument.</p> |
| 5722 | <p>A TYPE_INTEGER value buffer can conveniently be interpreted with |
| 5723 | the C library function atoi(3).</p> |
| 5724 | <h1 class="BRIDGEHEAD"><a name="AEN1090" id= |
| 5725 | "AEN1090"></a>TYPE_NUMERIC</h1> |
| 5726 | <p>This field type accepts a decimal number. It is set up as |
| 5727 | follows:</p> |
| 5728 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5729 | <tr> |
| 5730 | <td> |
| 5731 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5732 | <font color= |
| 5733 | "#000000">int set_field_type(FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 5734 | TYPE_NUMERIC, /* type to associate */ |
| 5735 | int padding, /* # places of precision */ |
| 5736 | int vmin, int vmax); /* valid range */</font> |
| 5737 | </pre></td> |
| 5738 | </tr> |
| 5739 | </table> |
| 5740 | <p>Valid characters consist of an optional leading minus and |
| 5741 | digits. possibly including a decimal point. The range check is |
| 5742 | performed on exit. If the range maximum is less than or equal to |
| 5743 | the minimum, the range is ignored.</p> |
| 5744 | <p>If the value passes its range check, it is padded with as many |
| 5745 | trailing zero digits as necessary to meet the padding argument.</p> |
| 5746 | <p>A TYPE_NUMERIC value buffer can conveniently be interpreted with |
| 5747 | the C library function atof(3).</p> |
| 5748 | <h1 class="BRIDGEHEAD"><a name="AEN1096" id= |
| 5749 | "AEN1096"></a>TYPE_REGEXP</h1> |
| 5750 | <p>This field type accepts data matching a regular expression. It |
| 5751 | is set up as follows:</p> |
| 5752 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5753 | <tr> |
| 5754 | <td> |
| 5755 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5756 | <font color= |
| 5757 | "#000000">int set_field_type(FIELD *field, /* field to alter */ |
| 5758 | TYPE_REGEXP, /* type to associate */ |
| 5759 | char *regexp); /* expression to match */</font> |
| 5760 | </pre></td> |
| 5761 | </tr> |
| 5762 | </table> |
| 5763 | <p>The syntax for regular expressions is that of regcomp(3). The |
| 5764 | check for regular-expression match is performed on exit.</p> |
| 5765 | </div> |
| 5766 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 5767 | <hr> |
| 5768 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="FORMDRIVER" id="FORMDRIVER">18.6. Form |
| 5769 | Driver: The work horse of the forms system</a></h3> |
| 5770 | <p>As in the menu system, form_driver() plays a very important role |
| 5771 | in forms system. All types of requests to forms system should be |
| 5772 | funneled through form_driver().</p> |
| 5773 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5774 | <tr> |
| 5775 | <td> |
| 5776 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5777 | <font color= |
| 5778 | "#000000">int form_driver(FORM *form, /* form on which to operate */ |
| 5779 | int request) /* form request code */</font> |
| 5780 | </pre></td> |
| 5781 | </tr> |
| 5782 | </table> |
| 5783 | <p>As you have seen some of the examples above, you have to be in a |
| 5784 | loop looking for user input and then decide whether it's a field |
| 5785 | data or a form request. The form requests are then passed to |
| 5786 | form_driver() to do the work.</p> |
| 5787 | <p>The requests roughly can be divided into following categories. |
| 5788 | Different requests and their usage is explained below:</p> |
| 5789 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 5790 | <hr> |
| 5791 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="PAGENAVREQ" id="PAGENAVREQ">18.6.1. Page |
| 5792 | Navigation Requests</a></h4> |
| 5793 | <p>These requests cause page-level moves through the form, |
| 5794 | triggering display of a new form screen. A form can be made of |
| 5795 | multiple pages. If you have a big form with lot of fields and |
| 5796 | logical sections, then you can divide the form into pages. The |
| 5797 | function set_new_page() to set a new page at the field |
| 5798 | specified.</p> |
| 5799 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 5800 | <tr> |
| 5801 | <td> |
| 5802 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 5803 | <font color= |
| 5804 | "#000000">int set_new_page(FIELD *field,/* Field at which page break to be set or unset */ |
| 5805 | bool new_page_flag); /* should be TRUE to put a break */</font> |
| 5806 | </pre></td> |
| 5807 | </tr> |
| 5808 | </table> |
| 5809 | <p>The following requests allow you to move to different pages</p> |
| 5810 | <ul> |
| 5811 | <li> |
| 5812 | <p><em>REQ_NEXT_PAGE</em> Move to the next form page.</p> |
| 5813 | </li> |
| 5814 | <li> |
| 5815 | <p><em>REQ_PREV_PAGE</em> Move to the previous form page.</p> |
| 5816 | </li> |
| 5817 | <li> |
| 5818 | <p><em>REQ_FIRST_PAGE</em> Move to the first form page.</p> |
| 5819 | </li> |
| 5820 | <li> |
| 5821 | <p><em>REQ_LAST_PAGE</em> Move to the last form page.</p> |
| 5822 | </li> |
| 5823 | </ul> |
| 5824 | <p>These requests treat the list as cyclic; that is, REQ_NEXT_PAGE |
| 5825 | from the last page goes to the first, and REQ_PREV_PAGE from the |
| 5826 | first page goes to the last.</p> |
| 5827 | </div> |
| 5828 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 5829 | <hr> |
| 5830 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="INTERFIELDNAVREQ" id= |
| 5831 | "INTERFIELDNAVREQ">18.6.2. Inter-Field Navigation Requests</a></h4> |
| 5832 | <p>These requests handle navigation between fields on the same |
| 5833 | page.</p> |
| 5834 | <ul> |
| 5835 | <li> |
| 5836 | <p><em>REQ_NEXT_FIELD</em> Move to next field.</p> |
| 5837 | </li> |
| 5838 | <li> |
| 5839 | <p><em>REQ_PREV_FIELD</em> Move to previous field.</p> |
| 5840 | </li> |
| 5841 | <li> |
| 5842 | <p><em>REQ_FIRST_FIELD</em> Move to the first field.</p> |
| 5843 | </li> |
| 5844 | <li> |
| 5845 | <p><em>REQ_LAST_FIELD</em> Move to the last field.</p> |
| 5846 | </li> |
| 5847 | <li> |
| 5848 | <p><em>REQ_SNEXT_FIELD</em> Move to sorted next field.</p> |
| 5849 | </li> |
| 5850 | <li> |
| 5851 | <p><em>REQ_SPREV_FIELD</em> Move to sorted previous field.</p> |
| 5852 | </li> |
| 5853 | <li> |
| 5854 | <p><em>REQ_SFIRST_FIELD</em> Move to the sorted first field.</p> |
| 5855 | </li> |
| 5856 | <li> |
| 5857 | <p><em>REQ_SLAST_FIELD</em> Move to the sorted last field.</p> |
| 5858 | </li> |
| 5859 | <li> |
| 5860 | <p><em>REQ_LEFT_FIELD</em> Move left to field.</p> |
| 5861 | </li> |
| 5862 | <li> |
| 5863 | <p><em>REQ_RIGHT_FIELD</em> Move right to field.</p> |
| 5864 | </li> |
| 5865 | <li> |
| 5866 | <p><em>REQ_UP_FIELD</em> Move up to field.</p> |
| 5867 | </li> |
| 5868 | <li> |
| 5869 | <p><em>REQ_DOWN_FIELD</em> Move down to field.</p> |
| 5870 | </li> |
| 5871 | </ul> |
| 5872 | <p>These requests treat the list of fields on a page as cyclic; |
| 5873 | that is, REQ_NEXT_FIELD from the last field goes to the first, and |
| 5874 | REQ_PREV_FIELD from the first field goes to the last. The order of |
| 5875 | the fields for these (and the REQ_FIRST_FIELD and REQ_LAST_FIELD |
| 5876 | requests) is simply the order of the field pointers in the form |
| 5877 | array (as set up by new_form() or set_form_fields()</p> |
| 5878 | <p>It is also possible to traverse the fields as if they had been |
| 5879 | sorted in screen-position order, so the sequence goes left-to-right |
| 5880 | and top-to-bottom. To do this, use the second group of four |
| 5881 | sorted-movement requests.</p> |
| 5882 | <p>Finally, it is possible to move between fields using visual |
| 5883 | directions up, down, right, and left. To accomplish this, use the |
| 5884 | third group of four requests. Note, however, that the position of a |
| 5885 | form for purposes of these requests is its upper-left corner.</p> |
| 5886 | <p>For example, suppose you have a multi-line field B, and two |
| 5887 | single-line fields A and C on the same line with B, with A to the |
| 5888 | left of B and C to the right of B. A REQ_MOVE_RIGHT from A will go |
| 5889 | to B only if A, B, and C all share the same first line; otherwise |
| 5890 | it will skip over B to C.</p> |
| 5891 | </div> |
| 5892 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 5893 | <hr> |
| 5894 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="INTRAFIELDNAVREQ" id= |
| 5895 | "INTRAFIELDNAVREQ">18.6.3. Intra-Field Navigation Requests</a></h4> |
| 5896 | <p>These requests drive movement of the edit cursor within the |
| 5897 | currently selected field.</p> |
| 5898 | <ul> |
| 5899 | <li> |
| 5900 | <p><em>REQ_NEXT_CHAR</em> Move to next character.</p> |
| 5901 | </li> |
| 5902 | <li> |
| 5903 | <p><em>REQ_PREV_CHAR</em> Move to previous character.</p> |
| 5904 | </li> |
| 5905 | <li> |
| 5906 | <p><em>REQ_NEXT_LINE</em> Move to next line.</p> |
| 5907 | </li> |
| 5908 | <li> |
| 5909 | <p><em>REQ_PREV_LINE</em> Move to previous line.</p> |
| 5910 | </li> |
| 5911 | <li> |
| 5912 | <p><em>REQ_NEXT_WORD</em> Move to next word.</p> |
| 5913 | </li> |
| 5914 | <li> |
| 5915 | <p><em>REQ_PREV_WORD</em> Move to previous word.</p> |
| 5916 | </li> |
| 5917 | <li> |
| 5918 | <p><em>REQ_BEG_FIELD</em> Move to beginning of field.</p> |
| 5919 | </li> |
| 5920 | <li> |
| 5921 | <p><em>REQ_END_FIELD</em> Move to end of field.</p> |
| 5922 | </li> |
| 5923 | <li> |
| 5924 | <p><em>REQ_BEG_LINE</em> Move to beginning of line.</p> |
| 5925 | </li> |
| 5926 | <li> |
| 5927 | <p><em>REQ_END_LINE</em> Move to end of line.</p> |
| 5928 | </li> |
| 5929 | <li> |
| 5930 | <p><em>REQ_LEFT_CHAR</em> Move left in field.</p> |
| 5931 | </li> |
| 5932 | <li> |
| 5933 | <p><em>REQ_RIGHT_CHAR</em> Move right in field.</p> |
| 5934 | </li> |
| 5935 | <li> |
| 5936 | <p><em>REQ_UP_CHAR</em> Move up in field.</p> |
| 5937 | </li> |
| 5938 | <li> |
| 5939 | <p><em>REQ_DOWN_CHAR</em> Move down in field.</p> |
| 5940 | </li> |
| 5941 | </ul> |
| 5942 | <p>Each word is separated from the previous and next characters by |
| 5943 | whitespace. The commands to move to beginning and end of line or |
| 5944 | field look for the first or last non-pad character in their |
| 5945 | ranges.</p> |
| 5946 | </div> |
| 5947 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 5948 | <hr> |
| 5949 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="SCROLLREQ" id="SCROLLREQ">18.6.4. |
| 5950 | Scrolling Requests</a></h4> |
| 5951 | <p>Fields that are dynamic and have grown and fields explicitly |
| 5952 | created with offscreen rows are scrollable. One-line fields scroll |
| 5953 | horizontally; multi-line fields scroll vertically. Most scrolling |
| 5954 | is triggered by editing and intra-field movement (the library |
| 5955 | scrolls the field to keep the cursor visible). It is possible to |
| 5956 | explicitly request scrolling with the following requests:</p> |
| 5957 | <ul> |
| 5958 | <li> |
| 5959 | <p><em>REQ_SCR_FLINE</em> Scroll vertically forward a line.</p> |
| 5960 | </li> |
| 5961 | <li> |
| 5962 | <p><em>REQ_SCR_BLINE</em> Scroll vertically backward a line.</p> |
| 5963 | </li> |
| 5964 | <li> |
| 5965 | <p><em>REQ_SCR_FPAGE</em> Scroll vertically forward a page.</p> |
| 5966 | </li> |
| 5967 | <li> |
| 5968 | <p><em>REQ_SCR_BPAGE</em> Scroll vertically backward a page.</p> |
| 5969 | </li> |
| 5970 | <li> |
| 5971 | <p><em>REQ_SCR_FHPAGE</em> Scroll vertically forward half a |
| 5972 | page.</p> |
| 5973 | </li> |
| 5974 | <li> |
| 5975 | <p><em>REQ_SCR_BHPAGE</em> Scroll vertically backward half a |
| 5976 | page.</p> |
| 5977 | </li> |
| 5978 | <li> |
| 5979 | <p><em>REQ_SCR_FCHAR</em> Scroll horizontally forward a |
| 5980 | character.</p> |
| 5981 | </li> |
| 5982 | <li> |
| 5983 | <p><em>REQ_SCR_BCHAR</em> Scroll horizontally backward a |
| 5984 | character.</p> |
| 5985 | </li> |
| 5986 | <li> |
| 5987 | <p><em>REQ_SCR_HFLINE</em> Scroll horizontally one field width |
| 5988 | forward.</p> |
| 5989 | </li> |
| 5990 | <li> |
| 5991 | <p><em>REQ_SCR_HBLINE</em> Scroll horizontally one field width |
| 5992 | backward.</p> |
| 5993 | </li> |
| 5994 | <li> |
| 5995 | <p><em>REQ_SCR_HFHALF</em> Scroll horizontally one half field width |
| 5996 | forward.</p> |
| 5997 | </li> |
| 5998 | <li> |
| 5999 | <p><em>REQ_SCR_HBHALF</em> Scroll horizontally one half field width |
| 6000 | backward.</p> |
| 6001 | </li> |
| 6002 | </ul> |
| 6003 | <p>For scrolling purposes, a page of a field is the height of its |
| 6004 | visible part.</p> |
| 6005 | </div> |
| 6006 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 6007 | <hr> |
| 6008 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="EDITREQ" id="EDITREQ">18.6.5. Editing |
| 6009 | Requests</a></h4> |
| 6010 | <p>When you pass the forms driver an ASCII character, it is treated |
| 6011 | as a request to add the character to the field's data buffer. |
| 6012 | Whether this is an insertion or a replacement depends on the |
| 6013 | field's edit mode (insertion is the default.</p> |
| 6014 | <p>The following requests support editing the field and changing |
| 6015 | the edit mode:</p> |
| 6016 | <ul> |
| 6017 | <li> |
| 6018 | <p><em>REQ_INS_MODE</em> Set insertion mode.</p> |
| 6019 | </li> |
| 6020 | <li> |
| 6021 | <p><em>REQ_OVL_MODE</em> Set overlay mode.</p> |
| 6022 | </li> |
| 6023 | <li> |
| 6024 | <p><em>REQ_NEW_LINE</em> New line request (see below for |
| 6025 | explanation).</p> |
| 6026 | </li> |
| 6027 | <li> |
| 6028 | <p><em>REQ_INS_CHAR</em> Insert space at character location.</p> |
| 6029 | </li> |
| 6030 | <li> |
| 6031 | <p><em>REQ_INS_LINE</em> Insert blank line at character |
| 6032 | location.</p> |
| 6033 | </li> |
| 6034 | <li> |
| 6035 | <p><em>REQ_DEL_CHAR</em> Delete character at cursor.</p> |
| 6036 | </li> |
| 6037 | <li> |
| 6038 | <p><em>REQ_DEL_PREV</em> Delete previous word at cursor.</p> |
| 6039 | </li> |
| 6040 | <li> |
| 6041 | <p><em>REQ_DEL_LINE</em> Delete line at cursor.</p> |
| 6042 | </li> |
| 6043 | <li> |
| 6044 | <p><em>REQ_DEL_WORD</em> Delete word at cursor.</p> |
| 6045 | </li> |
| 6046 | <li> |
| 6047 | <p><em>REQ_CLR_EOL</em> Clear to end of line.</p> |
| 6048 | </li> |
| 6049 | <li> |
| 6050 | <p><em>REQ_CLR_EOF</em> Clear to end of field.</p> |
| 6051 | </li> |
| 6052 | <li> |
| 6053 | <p><em>REQ_CLR_FIELD</em> Clear entire field.</p> |
| 6054 | </li> |
| 6055 | </ul> |
| 6056 | <p>The behavior of the REQ_NEW_LINE and REQ_DEL_PREV requests is |
| 6057 | complicated and partly controlled by a pair of forms options. The |
| 6058 | special cases are triggered when the cursor is at the beginning of |
| 6059 | a field, or on the last line of the field.</p> |
| 6060 | <p>First, we consider REQ_NEW_LINE:</p> |
| 6061 | <p>The normal behavior of REQ_NEW_LINE in insert mode is to break |
| 6062 | the current line at the position of the edit cursor, inserting the |
| 6063 | portion of the current line after the cursor as a new line |
| 6064 | following the current and moving the cursor to the beginning of |
| 6065 | that new line (you may think of this as inserting a newline in the |
| 6066 | field buffer).</p> |
| 6067 | <p>The normal behavior of REQ_NEW_LINE in overlay mode is to clear |
| 6068 | the current line from the position of the edit cursor to end of |
| 6069 | line. The cursor is then moved to the beginning of the next |
| 6070 | line.</p> |
| 6071 | <p>However, REQ_NEW_LINE at the beginning of a field, or on the |
| 6072 | last line of a field, instead does a REQ_NEXT_FIELD. O_NL_OVERLOAD |
| 6073 | option is off, this special action is disabled.</p> |
| 6074 | <p>Now, let us consider REQ_DEL_PREV:</p> |
| 6075 | <p>The normal behavior of REQ_DEL_PREV is to delete the previous |
| 6076 | character. If insert mode is on, and the cursor is at the start of |
| 6077 | a line, and the text on that line will fit on the previous one, it |
| 6078 | instead appends the contents of the current line to the previous |
| 6079 | one and deletes the current line (you may think of this as deleting |
| 6080 | a newline from the field buffer).</p> |
| 6081 | <p>However, REQ_DEL_PREV at the beginning of a field is instead |
| 6082 | treated as a REQ_PREV_FIELD.</p> |
| 6083 | <p>If the O_BS_OVERLOAD option is off, this special action is |
| 6084 | disabled and the forms driver just returns E_REQUEST_DENIED.</p> |
| 6085 | </div> |
| 6086 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 6087 | <hr> |
| 6088 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="ORDERREQ" id="ORDERREQ">18.6.6. Order |
| 6089 | Requests</a></h4> |
| 6090 | <p>If the type of your field is ordered, and has associated |
| 6091 | functions for getting the next and previous values of the type from |
| 6092 | a given value, there are requests that can fetch that value into |
| 6093 | the field buffer:</p> |
| 6094 | <ul> |
| 6095 | <li> |
| 6096 | <p><em>REQ_NEXT_CHOICE</em> Place the successor value of the |
| 6097 | current value in the buffer.</p> |
| 6098 | </li> |
| 6099 | <li> |
| 6100 | <p><em>REQ_PREV_CHOICE</em> Place the predecessor value of the |
| 6101 | current value in the buffer.</p> |
| 6102 | </li> |
| 6103 | </ul> |
| 6104 | <p>Of the built-in field types, only TYPE_ENUM has built-in |
| 6105 | successor and predecessor functions. When you define a field type |
| 6106 | of your own (see Custom Validation Types), you can associate our |
| 6107 | own ordering functions.</p> |
| 6108 | </div> |
| 6109 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 6110 | <hr> |
| 6111 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="APPLICCOMMANDS" id= |
| 6112 | "APPLICCOMMANDS">18.6.7. Application Commands</a></h4> |
| 6113 | <p>Form requests are represented as integers above the curses value |
| 6114 | greater than KEY_MAX and less than or equal to the constant |
| 6115 | MAX_COMMAND. A value within this range gets ignored by |
| 6116 | form_driver(). So this can be used for any purpose by the |
| 6117 | application. It can be treated as an application specific action |
| 6118 | and take corresponding action.</p> |
| 6119 | </div> |
| 6120 | </div> |
| 6121 | </div> |
| 6122 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 6123 | <hr> |
| 6124 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="TOOLS" id="TOOLS">19. Tools and Widget |
| 6125 | Libraries</a></h2> |
| 6126 | <p>Now that you have seen the capabilities of ncurses and its |
| 6127 | sister libraries, you are rolling your sleeves up and gearing for a |
| 6128 | project that heavily manipulates screen. But wait.. It can be |
| 6129 | pretty difficult to write and maintain complex GUI widgets in plain |
| 6130 | ncurses or even with the additional libraries. There are some |
| 6131 | ready-to-use tools and widget libraries that can be used instead of |
| 6132 | writing your own widgets. You can use some of them, get ideas from |
| 6133 | the code, or even extend them.</p> |
| 6134 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 6135 | <hr> |
| 6136 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="CDK" id="CDK">19.1. CDK (Curses |
| 6137 | Development Kit)</a></h3> |
| 6138 | <p>In the author's words</p> |
| 6139 | <p><em>CDK stands for 'Curses Development Kit' and it currently |
| 6140 | contains 21 ready to use widgets which facilitate the speedy |
| 6141 | development of full screen curses programs.</em></p> |
| 6142 | <p>The kit provides some useful widgets, which can be used in your |
| 6143 | programs directly. It's pretty well written and the documentation |
| 6144 | is very good. The examples in the examples directory can be a good |
| 6145 | place to start for beginners. The CDK can be downloaded from |
| 6146 | <a href="http://invisible-island.net/cdk/" target= |
| 6147 | "_top">http://invisible-island.net/cdk/</a> . Follow the |
| 6148 | instructions in README file to install it.</p> |
| 6149 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 6150 | <hr> |
| 6151 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="WIDGETLIST" id="WIDGETLIST">19.1.1. |
| 6152 | Widget List</a></h4> |
| 6153 | <p>The following is the list of widgets provided with cdk and their |
| 6154 | description.</p> |
| 6155 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 6156 | <tr> |
| 6157 | <td> |
| 6158 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 6159 | <font color="#000000">Widget Type Quick Description |
| 6160 | =========================================================================== |
| 6161 | Alphalist Allows a user to select from a list of words, with |
| 6162 | the ability to narrow the search list by typing in a |
| 6163 | few characters of the desired word. |
| 6164 | Buttonbox This creates a multiple button widget. |
| 6165 | Calendar Creates a little simple calendar widget. |
| 6166 | Dialog Prompts the user with a message, and the user |
| 6167 | can pick an answer from the buttons provided. |
| 6168 | Entry Allows the user to enter various types of information. |
| 6169 | File Selector A file selector built from Cdk base widgets. This |
| 6170 | example shows how to create more complicated widgets |
| 6171 | using the Cdk widget library. |
| 6172 | Graph Draws a graph. |
| 6173 | Histogram Draws a histogram. |
| 6174 | Item List Creates a pop up field which allows the user to select |
| 6175 | one of several choices in a small field. Very useful |
| 6176 | for things like days of the week or month names. |
| 6177 | Label Displays messages in a pop up box, or the label can be |
| 6178 | considered part of the screen. |
| 6179 | Marquee Displays a message in a scrolling marquee. |
| 6180 | Matrix Creates a complex matrix with lots of options. |
| 6181 | Menu Creates a pull-down menu interface. |
| 6182 | Multiple Line Entry A multiple line entry field. Very useful |
| 6183 | for long fields. (like a description |
| 6184 | field) |
| 6185 | Radio List Creates a radio button list. |
| 6186 | Scale Creates a numeric scale. Used for allowing a user to |
| 6187 | pick a numeric value and restrict them to a range of |
| 6188 | values. |
| 6189 | Scrolling List Creates a scrolling list/menu list. |
| 6190 | Scrolling Window Creates a scrolling log file viewer. Can add |
| 6191 | information into the window while its running. |
| 6192 | A good widget for displaying the progress of |
| 6193 | something. (akin to a console window) |
| 6194 | Selection List Creates a multiple option selection list. |
| 6195 | Slider Akin to the scale widget, this widget provides a |
| 6196 | visual slide bar to represent the numeric value. |
| 6197 | Template Creates a entry field with character sensitive |
| 6198 | positions. Used for pre-formatted fields like |
| 6199 | dates and phone numbers. |
| 6200 | Viewer This is a file/information viewer. Very useful |
| 6201 | when you need to display loads of information. |
| 6202 | ===========================================================================</font> |
| 6203 | </pre></td> |
| 6204 | </tr> |
| 6205 | </table> |
| 6206 | <p>A few of the widgets are modified by Thomas Dickey in recent |
| 6207 | versions.</p> |
| 6208 | </div> |
| 6209 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 6210 | <hr> |
| 6211 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="CDKATTRACT" id="CDKATTRACT">19.1.2. Some |
| 6212 | Attractive Features</a></h4> |
| 6213 | <p>Apart from making our life easier with readily usable widgets, |
| 6214 | cdk solves one frustrating problem with printing multi colored |
| 6215 | strings, justified strings elegantly. Special formatting tags can |
| 6216 | be embedded in the strings which are passed to CDK functions. For |
| 6217 | Example</p> |
| 6218 | <p>If the string</p> |
| 6219 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 6220 | <tr> |
| 6221 | <td> |
| 6222 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 6223 | <font color= |
| 6224 | "#000000">"</B/1>This line should have a yellow foreground and a blue |
| 6225 | background.<!1>"</font> |
| 6226 | </pre></td> |
| 6227 | </tr> |
| 6228 | </table> |
| 6229 | <p>given as a parameter to newCDKLabel(), it prints the line with |
| 6230 | yellow foreground and blue background. There are other tags |
| 6231 | available for justifying string, embedding special drawing |
| 6232 | characters etc.. Please refer to the man page cdk_display(3X) for |
| 6233 | details. The man page explains the usage with nice examples.</p> |
| 6234 | </div> |
| 6235 | <div class="SECT3"> |
| 6236 | <hr> |
| 6237 | <h4 class="SECT3"><a name="CDKCONCLUSION" id= |
| 6238 | "CDKCONCLUSION">19.1.3. Conclusion</a></h4> |
| 6239 | <p>All in all, CDK is a well-written package of widgets, which if |
| 6240 | used properly can form a strong frame work for developing complex |
| 6241 | GUI.</p> |
| 6242 | </div> |
| 6243 | </div> |
| 6244 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 6245 | <hr> |
| 6246 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="DIALOG" id="DIALOG">19.2. The |
| 6247 | dialog</a></h3> |
| 6248 | <p>Long long ago, in September 1994, when few people knew linux, |
| 6249 | Jeff Tranter wrote an <a href= |
| 6250 | "http://www2.linuxjournal.com/lj-issues/issue5/2807.html" target= |
| 6251 | "_top">article</a> on dialog in Linux Journal. He starts the |
| 6252 | article with these words..</p> |
| 6253 | <p><em>Linux is based on the Unix operating system, but also |
| 6254 | features a number of unique and useful kernel features and |
| 6255 | application programs that often go beyond what is available under |
| 6256 | Unix. One little-known gem is "dialog", a utility for creating |
| 6257 | professional-looking dialog boxes from within shell scripts. This |
| 6258 | article presents a tutorial introduction to the dialog utility, and |
| 6259 | shows examples of how and where it can be used</em></p> |
| 6260 | <p>As he explains, dialog is a real gem in making |
| 6261 | professional-looking dialog boxes with ease. It creates a variety |
| 6262 | of dialog boxes, menus, check lists etc.. It is usually installed |
| 6263 | by default. If not, you can download it from <a href= |
| 6264 | "http://invisible-island.net/dialog/" target="_top">Thomas |
| 6265 | Dickey</a>'s site.</p> |
| 6266 | <p>The above-mentioned article gives a very good overview of its |
| 6267 | uses and capabilites. The man page has more details. It can be used |
| 6268 | in variety of situations. One good example is building of linux |
| 6269 | kernel in text mode. Linux kernel uses a modified version of dialog |
| 6270 | tailored for its needs.</p> |
| 6271 | <p>dialog was initially designed to be used with shell scripts. If |
| 6272 | you want to use its functionality in a c program, then you can use |
| 6273 | libdialog. The documentation regarding this is sparse. Definitive |
| 6274 | reference is the dialog.h header file which comes with the library. |
| 6275 | You may need to hack here and there to get the required output. The |
| 6276 | source is easily customizable. I have used it on a number of |
| 6277 | occasions by modifying the code.</p> |
| 6278 | </div> |
| 6279 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 6280 | <hr> |
| 6281 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="PERLCURSES" id="PERLCURSES">19.3. Perl |
| 6282 | Curses Modules CURSES::FORM and CURSES::WIDGETS</a></h3> |
| 6283 | <p>The perl module Curses, Curses::Form and Curses::Widgets give |
| 6284 | access to curses from perl. If you have curses and basic perl is |
| 6285 | installed, you can get these modules from <a href= |
| 6286 | "http://www.cpan.org/modules/01modules.index.html" target= |
| 6287 | "_top">CPAN All Modules page</a>. Get the three zipped modules in |
| 6288 | the Curses category. Once installed you can use these modules from |
| 6289 | perl scripts like any other module. For more information on perl |
| 6290 | modules see perlmod man page. The above modules come with good |
| 6291 | documentation and they have some demo scripts to test the |
| 6292 | functionality. Though the widgets provided are very rudimentary, |
| 6293 | these modules provide good access to curses library from perl.</p> |
| 6294 | <p>Some of my code examples are converted to perl by Anuradha |
| 6295 | Ratnaweera and they are available in the <var class= |
| 6296 | "LITERAL">perl</var> directory.</p> |
| 6297 | <p>For more information see man pages Curses(3) , Curses::Form(3) |
| 6298 | and Curses::Widgets(3). These pages are installed only when the |
| 6299 | above modules are acquired and installed.</p> |
| 6300 | </div> |
| 6301 | </div> |
| 6302 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 6303 | <hr> |
| 6304 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="JUSTFORFUN" id="JUSTFORFUN">20. Just For |
| 6305 | Fun !!!</a></h2> |
| 6306 | <p>This section contains few programs written by me just for fun. |
| 6307 | They don't signify a better programming practice or the best way of |
| 6308 | using ncurses. They are provided here so as to allow beginners to |
| 6309 | get ideas and add more programs to this section. If you have |
| 6310 | written a couple of nice, simple programs in curses and want them |
| 6311 | to included here, contact <a href="mailto:ppadala@gmail.com" |
| 6312 | target="_top">me</a>.</p> |
| 6313 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 6314 | <hr> |
| 6315 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="GAMEOFLIFE" id="GAMEOFLIFE">20.1. The |
| 6316 | Game of Life</a></h3> |
| 6317 | <p>Game of life is a wonder of math. In <a href= |
| 6318 | "http://www.math.com/students/wonders/life/life.html" target= |
| 6319 | "_top">Paul Callahan</a>'s words</p> |
| 6320 | <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%"> |
| 6321 | <tr> |
| 6322 | <td> |
| 6323 | <pre class="PROGRAMLISTING"> |
| 6324 | <font color= |
| 6325 | "#000000"><em>The Game of Life (or simply Life) is not a game in the conventional sense. There |
| 6326 | are no players, and no winning or losing. Once the "pieces" are placed in the |
| 6327 | starting position, the rules determine everything that happens later. |
| 6328 | Nevertheless, Life is full of surprises! In most cases, it is impossible to look |
| 6329 | at a starting position (or pattern) and see what will happen in the future. The |
| 6330 | only way to find out is to follow the rules of the game.</em></font> |
| 6331 | </pre></td> |
| 6332 | </tr> |
| 6333 | </table> |
| 6334 | <p>This program starts with a simple inverted U pattern and shows |
| 6335 | how wonderful life works. There is a lot of room for improvement in |
| 6336 | the program. You can let the user enter pattern of his choice or |
| 6337 | even take input from a file. You can also change rules and play |
| 6338 | with a lot of variations. Search on <a href="http://www.google.com" |
| 6339 | target="_top">google</a> for interesting information on game of |
| 6340 | life.</p> |
| 6341 | <p><em>File Path: JustForFun/life.c</em></p> |
| 6342 | </div> |
| 6343 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 6344 | <hr> |
| 6345 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="MAGIC" id="MAGIC">20.2. Magic |
| 6346 | Square</a></h3> |
| 6347 | <p>Magic Square, another wonder of math, is very simple to |
| 6348 | understand but very difficult to make. In a magic square sum of the |
| 6349 | numbers in each row, each column is equal. Even diagnol sum can be |
| 6350 | equal. There are many variations which have special properties.</p> |
| 6351 | <p>This program creates a simple magic square of odd order.</p> |
| 6352 | <p><em>File Path: JustForFun/magic.c</em></p> |
| 6353 | </div> |
| 6354 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 6355 | <hr> |
| 6356 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="HANOI" id="HANOI">20.3. Towers of |
| 6357 | Hanoi</a></h3> |
| 6358 | <p>The famous towers of hanoi solver. The aim of the game is to |
| 6359 | move the disks on the first peg to last peg, using middle peg as a |
| 6360 | temporary stay. The catch is not to place a larger disk over a |
| 6361 | small disk at any time.</p> |
| 6362 | <p><em>File Path: JustForFun/hanoi.c</em></p> |
| 6363 | </div> |
| 6364 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 6365 | <hr> |
| 6366 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="QUEENS" id="QUEENS">20.4. Queens |
| 6367 | Puzzle</a></h3> |
| 6368 | <p>The objective of the famous N-Queen puzzle is to put N queens on |
| 6369 | a N X N chess board without attacking each other.</p> |
| 6370 | <p>This program solves it with a simple backtracking technique.</p> |
| 6371 | <p><em>File Path: JustForFun/queens.c</em></p> |
| 6372 | </div> |
| 6373 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 6374 | <hr> |
| 6375 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="SHUFFLE" id="SHUFFLE">20.5. |
| 6376 | Shuffle</a></h3> |
| 6377 | <p>A fun game, if you have time to kill.</p> |
| 6378 | <p><em>File Path: JustForFun/shuffle.c</em></p> |
| 6379 | </div> |
| 6380 | <div class="SECT2"> |
| 6381 | <hr> |
| 6382 | <h3 class="SECT2"><a name="TT" id="TT">20.6. Typing Tutor</a></h3> |
| 6383 | <p>A simple typing tutor, I created more out of need than for ease |
| 6384 | of use. If you know how to put your fingers correctly on the |
| 6385 | keyboard, but lack practice, this can be helpful.</p> |
| 6386 | <p><em>File Path: JustForFun/tt.c</em></p> |
| 6387 | </div> |
| 6388 | </div> |
| 6389 | <div class="SECT1"> |
| 6390 | <hr> |
| 6391 | <h2 class="SECT1"><a name="REF" id="REF">21. References</a></h2> |
| 6392 | <ul> |
| 6393 | <li> |
| 6394 | <p>NCURSES man pages</p> |
| 6395 | </li> |
| 6396 | <li> |
| 6397 | <p>NCURSES FAQ at <a href= |
| 6398 | "http://invisible-island.net/ncurses/ncurses.faq.html" target= |
| 6399 | "_top">http://invisible-island.net/ncurses/ncurses.faq.html</a></p> |
| 6400 | </li> |
| 6401 | <li> |
| 6402 | <p>Writing programs with NCURSES by Eric Raymond and Zeyd M. |
| 6403 | Ben-Halim at <a href= |
| 6404 | "http://invisible-island.net/ncurses/ncurses-intro.html" target= |
| 6405 | "_top">http://invisible-island.net/ncurses/ncurses-intro.html</a> - |
| 6406 | somewhat obsolete. I was inspired by this document and the |
| 6407 | structure of this HOWTO follows from the original document</p> |
| 6408 | </li> |
| 6409 | </ul> |
| 6410 | </div> |
| 6411 | </div> |
| 6412 | </body> |
| 6413 | </html> |